Multifunctional Display.

Navi-
Sailor 4000 ECDIS
User Manual
Version 3.02.350

Date of issue: February 2021

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Ltd. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein is proprietary to Wärtsilä Voyage Limited and shall not be duplicated in whole or
in part. The technical details contained in this manual are accurate at the date of issue but are subject to change
without prior notice.
Wärtsilä Voyage Limited pursues a policy of continuous development. This may mean that the product delivered
has additional enhancements not yet covered by the latest version of this manual.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective
owners.
Wärtsilä uses data gathered from equipment and software to improve and develop its products and services.
Disclaimer: Supplier’s Products and Services related to the operation and monitoring of vessels (including but
not limited to solutions relating to onboard navigation and remote ship traffic control) are provided only as an aid to
decision making. The safe voyage planning, navigation, manoeuvring, operation and monitoring of and
instructions and advice given to vessels are dependent on human skill and judgement and are the responsibility
of the relevant appropriately qualified personnel responsible for such tasks in accordance with all applicable laws,
regulations and best practices. Accordingly, Supplier will not be liable for any accident, damage or delay caused
by or to any vessel owned or operated by Customer or any other person whether or not the accident or damage is
related to the operation or failure of the Products or Services.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents 3
Printing House Conventions 12
List of Documents 12
Preamble 13
Annotation 14
Definitions and Abbreviations 14
Abbreviations 14
Definitions 16
Purpose of ECDIS Task 19
ECDIS User Interface 20
ECDIS User Interface Structure 22
Main and Dual Chart Panels 23
Chart Areas 24
Toolbars 24
User Interface Components 26
Panels 26
Pages 27
Control Panel Windows 28
List Box Menu 28
Text Boxes 28
Buttons 29
Radio Buttons 29
Indicators 29
Progress Bars 30
ECDIS Task Control Panel 30
COG/SOG/HDG/STW Window 31
Alerts Window 32
Application Window 32
Position Dropped Window 32
Sensors Window 33
Vectors Window 33
Network Window 33
Indications Window 34
Time Window 34

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 3

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Verersion 3.02.350

Primary Window 35
Secondary Window 35
Charts Area Window 36
Display Panel Window 36
Operational Window 37
EBL/VRM/CHL Window 37
Information Window 37
Abbreviations Used in the User Interface 38
Use of Uniform Measurement Units 39
Keyboard 40
Virtual Keyboard 42
ECDIS Task Turning On/Off 43
Turning ECDIS Task On 44
Turning ECDIS Task Off 45
ECDIS Task Control 47
Transfer of Rights 48
Turning On/Off Control and Conning Panels Display on ECDIS Task Screen 48
Setting Control Panel Windows Display 50
Setting of Measurement Units 51
ECDIS Task Screen Configuration 52
Setting of Screen Colour Palette 52
Setting of Screen Graphic Presentation 53
Switching Graphic Cursor Type 53
Setting of Screen Boundaries Re-Draw as the Ship Symbol Approaches Them 54
Chart Panel Settings 54
Setting of Main and Dual Panel Displays 54
Setting of Ship Symbol on Chart Panel by Cursor Position 56
Setting Chart Panel Orientation 56
Setting Ship Symbol Motion Modes 57
Setting Ship Display and Its Motion Parameters on ECDIS Task Screen 57
Setting of Lengths of Own Ship and Target Vectors 58
Setting Time Zone 58
Setting Current Time Zone 59
Setting Time Zone Change 59
Use of ECDIS Task Tools 60
Return of Own Ship Symbol Display to ECDIS Task Screen 60

4 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Viewing Charts 60
ERBL 61
Zoom 62
EBL/VRM 62
Index Lines 63
Quick Distance Tool 65
Manual Entry in the Ship Log 66
Handling ECDIS Task Configurations 67
Using Local User Configuration 67
Creating Local User Configuration 67
Loading Local User Configuration 69
Deleting Local User Configuration 70
Using Default LocaL User Configurations 71
Using Bridge User Configuration 71
Creating Bridge User Configuration 71
Loading Bridge User Configuration 74
Deleting Bridge User Configuration 75
Navigation Tasks 76
Setting Position Sources 78
Setting Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS) 78
Setting ER Mode 81
Setting EP Mode 86
Setting DR Mode 87
Display of Non-Primary Positioning System Symbol on ECDIS Task Screen 89
Use of Manually Fixed Position for Determining Ship Position 90
Setting Heading Source 97
Setting Speed Sources 98
Setting Speed-Through-Water Source 99
Setting Speed-Over-Ground Source 99
Setting Depth Source 100
Obtaining Current Navigational Data Information 101
Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode 103
Setting Lead Distance (F-DIST) 103
Loading Route 104
Selection of Safety Parameters when Loading Monitored Route 109
Loading Schedule 112

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 5

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Verersion 3.02.350

Obtaining Current Information on Monitored Route and Schedule 113

Route Data 113
Schedule Information 114
Unloading Route and Schedule 116
Handling Charts and Chart Information 117
Prompt Search and Load Charts 117
Loading and Scaling Charts under Own Ship Position 118
Chart Loading 120
Selecting Loading Priority of Various Format Charts 121
Chart Scaling 122
Switching Chart Information Layers 123
Handling ENC Format Charts 126
Handling AIO Chart 128
Using Auto Zoom Function 132
Using Mooring Mode 133
Search and Rescue Operations 135
Using Man Overboard (MOB) Mode 135
Creating SAR Routes 137
Expanding Square Route 139
Parallel Tracks Route 140
Sector Search Route 141
Track Line Search Route 142
Creeping Line Search Route 143
Using Special Purpose Objects 145
Creating SPO 146
Deleting SPO 147
Other Functions 148
Saving and Loading SPO Configuration 148
Setting of Safety Parameters 150
Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the Schedule 151
Monitoring of Safety Alerts 153
Setting of Safety Parameters for Detection of Dangerous Objects 154
Setting of Safety Parameters in Sailing in the Vicinity of Dangerous Objects 156
Monitoring of Crossing of Area Limits in IMO and Additional Groups 156
Setting Priority for Navigational and Area Alerts 157
Safety Tools 158

6 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Clearing Bearing 158
Creating Clearing Bearing 159
Clearing Bearing Editing 162
Fast Clearing Bearing Search 164
Deleting Clearing Bearing 164
Saving and Loading Configuration 165
Monitoring of Navigational Alerts 166
Monitoring of Time 169
Setting of End-of-Watch Alerts 169
Timer Setting 170
Using Logging Functions 171
Using Ship Log Book 172
Creating User Accounts 173
Search for Events in Ship Log Book 175
Events Filtering 176
Custom Events Creation 177
Event Entering and Editing 179
Ship Log Book Editing 184
Separating Voyages 185
Work with Archive 187
Ship Log Book Printout 189
Using Electronic System Log Book 193
Own Ship Track in ECDIS Task 196
Setting Track Display Elements 196
Viewing Archive Tracks 199
Manual Updating 201
Turning On/Off Display of Updating Objects and Their Attributes 202
Creating and Plotting Updating Objects 203
Plotting Point Type Objects 204
Plotting Lines and Areas 206
Plotting Text Object 209
Plotting Depth Object 211
Plotting Shapes 213
Assigning “Attached File” Attribute 220
Editing Updating Objects 222
Editing Updating Objects Attributes 222

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 7

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Verersion 3.02.350

Editing Object Coordinates 224

Deleting Updating Object 226
Restoring Deleted Object 227
Search for Updating Objects 229
Handling Maps 232
Creating and Saving Maps 233
Creating and Plotting Map Objects 235
Plotting Symbol Type Objects 235
Plotting Lines 238
Plotting Text Object 240
Plotting Depth Object 241
Plotting Shapes 243
Assigning “Attached File” Attribute 250
Saving Map 252
Turning On/Off Display of Map Objects and Their Attributes 252
Map Loading and Unloading for Editing 253
Map Loading and Unloading for Monitoring 257
Editing Map Objects 260
Editing Map Object Attributes 260
Editing Map Object Coordinates 262
Deleting Map Object 264
Restoring Deleted Map Object 265
Merging Maps 266
Deleting Maps 268
Search for Map Objects 270
Map Handling in Network Configuration 271
Handling of Routes 273
Work with Route 274
Default Route Settings 274
Creating Route 275
Selecting Cursor Form 275
Plotting Route 277
Entering Additional Data 279
Route Loading and Unloading 282
Fast Route Search 283
Anchoring Operations 284

8 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Anchorage Planning in Route Plotting 284
Anchoring in Route Monitoring Mode 288
Editing Route 291
Graphic Route Editing Method 291
Tabular Route Editing Method 295
Shifting Route 297
Creating Reversed Route 299
Merging Routes 299
Deleting Route 300
Checking and Editing Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation 300
Protecting Route from Editing 305
Work with Schedule 306
Drawing Schedule 306
Editing a Schedule 310
Deleting Schedule 311
Voyage Plan Creation 311
Data Collection 311
Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon on Route 313
Voyage Plan Data Editing 314
Setting and Changing Reference Points 314
Deleting Reference Points 317
Search for Reference Point 318
Voyage Plan Print Preview and Printing 318
Exporting Voyage Plan 320
Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units 321
Radar Overlay 322
ARPA 325
Target Display 325
Turning On/Off External ARPA Tools 327
ARPA Settings 328
To Acquire Targets for Tracking 328
To Cancel Tracked Targets 329
To Turn on Ring Shaped Guard Zones 330
To Set Guard Zone Limits 331
To Turn Off Guard Zones 333
AIS 334

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 9

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Verersion 3.02.350

Handling AIS Targets 334

AIS Target Display 334
Display of AIS Target Identifiers 335
Display of Target Tracks 336
Prompt Target Search 337
Setting of Voyage Data 337
Transmission of Messages in AIS System 340
Reception of Messages in AIS System 343
Using AIS Safety Messages Database 346
Handling Targets 347
Setting of Safety Parameters in Tracking of Targets 347
Handling Target Table 348
Prompt Target Search 349
Turning On Mode of Associating AIS and ARPA Targets 351
Turning On DR Mode for AIS Targets 352
Filtering Lost Targets 354
Filtering AIS Targets 355
Obtaining Information on Target 357
Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task 358
Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects 359
Obtaining Information on Point Type Objects 359
Obtaining Information on Line and Area Type Objects 360
Obtaining Information on Vector Charts 361
Obtaining Information on Updating Objects 362
Obtaining Information on Map Objects 363
Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents 364
Obtaining Information on the Change of Tidal Heights 364
Information Displayed Graphically 366
Information Displayed in Tabular Form 367
Display of Tidal Heights on Chart Panel 369
Obtaining Information on Tidal Currents 370
Obtaining Information on Surface Currents 371
Use of Animation 372
Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon 374
Obtaining Current System Information 377
Obtaining Information on Ports 379

10 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information by Port Name 379
Obtaining Information by Region Name 380
Obtaining Information by Country Name 381
Obtaining Information by Cursor Position on Chart Panel 382
Quick Search for Selected Port 383
Obtaining NAVTEX Information 384
Work with NAVTEX Message Database 384
Work with Messages 388
Setting NAVTEX Message Status and Attributes 388
Editing Coordinates in NAVTEX Message 389
Fast Search for NAVTEX Message Symbol on the Chart Panel 391
Obtaining Information on Own Ship AIS Data 391
Obtaining Information on Current License 392
Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages 393
Display of Data Flow Between MFD and Different External Devices 394
COM Trace Record 395

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 11

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Printing House Conventions

SAMPLE OF NOTATION USAGE COMMENTS

Setup.exe Messages, commands, files, folders and other Windows OS info

<ENTER> Keyboard key names

Start > All Programs Menu items
Window names, tabs, icons, checkboxes, buttons, radio buttons and text box
Interface
captions, and other interface elements, important text
NOTE Notes
WARNING Warnings
Auxiliary text Auxiliary text
http://www.amver.com URL

List of Documents
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). User Manual.
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description.
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Additional Functions.
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide.
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Utilities.
Navi-Planner 4000 (v. 3.02.347). User Manual.

12 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Preamble •

Preamble
Preamble provides general information on the document.

Annotation 14
Definitions and Abbreviations 14
Abbreviations 14
Definitions 16
Purpose of ECDIS Task 19

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 13

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Annotation
The aim of this book is to provide the user with guidelines for the fulfilment of various tasks, to be accomplished
during the voyage, and to give the user some ideas of the ECDIS task operating principles and capabilities.
The description is divided into 11 parts:

Chapter 1. ECDIS User Interface.

Chapter 2. ECDIS Task Turning On/Off.
Chapter 3. ECDIS Task Control.
Chapter 4. Navigation Tasks.
Chapter 5. Setting of Safety Parameters.
Chapter 6. Using Logging Functions.
Chapter 7. Manual Updating.
Chapter 8. Handling of Maps.
Chapter 9. Handling of Routes.
Chapter 10. Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units.
Chapter 11. Obtaining of Information in the ECDIS Task.

Definitions and Abbreviations

Abbreviations
● AIS – Automatic Identification System;
● ARCS – Admiralty Raster Chart System;
● ARPA – Automatic Radar Plotting Aid;
● BAM – Bridge Alert Management;
● BNWAS – Bridge Navigational Watch Alarm System;
● BWOL – Bearing to Wheel Over Line;
● BWW - Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint;
● CCRP – Consistent Common Reference Point;
● CID - Conning Information Display;
● CIE – International Commission on Illumination;
● CMG – Course Made Good;
● COG – Course Over Ground;
● CPA – Closest Point of Approach;
● DGPS – Differential Global Positioning System;
● DM – Docking Mode;
● DR – Dead Reckoning;
● DWOL – Distance to Wheel Over Line;
● EBL – Electronic bearing line;
● ECDIS – Electronic Chart Display and Information System;
● EML – Expected Motion Line;
● ENC – Electronic Navigational Chart;
● EP – Estimated Position;
● EPFS – Electronic Position-Fixing System;
● ER – Echo Reference;
● ERBL – Electronic Range and Bearing Line;
● ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival;

14 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Preamble • Definitions and Abbreviations

● ETD – Estimated Time of Departure;

● F-DIST – forwarding distance;
● GC – Great Circle;
● GMT – Greenwich Mean Time;
● GPS – Global Positioning System;
● GZ – Guard Zone;
● HCRF – Hydrographic Chart Raster Format
● HDG – Heading;
● HO – Hydrographic Office;
● IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission;
● IHO – International Hydrographic Organization;
● IMO – International Maritime Organisation;
● INFO – Information;
● m – metre;
● min – minute;
● MMSI – Maritime Mobile Service Identities;
● MSI – Maritime Safety Information;
● MOB – Man Overboard;
● NAVTEX – Navigational Telex;
● NM – Nautical Mile;
● NMEA – National Marine Electronics Association;
● NS – Navi-Sailor;
● PORT – Port/Portside;
● PS – Positioning System;
● PTA – Planning Time of Arrival;
● RAD – Radius;
● RCDS – Raster Chart Display System;
● RIB – Radar Integrated Board;
● RL – Rhumb Line;
● RMS – Route Mean Square (error);
● RNC – Raster Navigational Chart;
● ROT – Rate Of Turn;
● RPM – Revolution Per Minute;
● SENC – System Electronic Navigational Chart;
● SOLAS – Safety of Life at Sea;
● SAR – Search And Rescue;
● s – second;
● SMG – Speed Made Good;
● SOG – Speed Over Ground;
● STBD – Starboard/Starboard Side;
● STG – Speed To Go;
● TCPA – Time to Closest Point of Approach;
● TTG – Time To Go;
● UTC – Universal Time Coordinated;
● VDR – Voyage Data Recorder;
● VRM – Variable Range Marker;
● WGS-84 – World Geodetic Datum;
● WOL – Wheel Over Line;
● WPT – Way Point;
● WS – Work Station;
● XTD – Cross Track Distance.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 15

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Definitions
Activated AIS target
Target activated for the display of additional graphically presented information.
Appropriate portfolio of up to date paper charts (APC)
A suite of paper charts of a scale to show sufficient detail of topography, depths, navigational hazards, aids to
navigation, charted routes, and routeing measures to provide the mariner with information on the overall navigational
environment.
CIE Colour Calibration
Colour calibration at the monitor performed to transform the CIE-specified colours for ECDIS into the colour
coordinate system of the screen
Common Reference System
Means provided to assure that when navigational information from sensors and other information sources is
displayed together with charted information, it is referenced to a consistent common reference point (CCRP).
Compilation Scale
The scale at which the data was compiled.
Corrupted Data
ENC data produced according to the IHO S-57 ENC product specification, but altered or modified during production,
transmission, or retrieval.
Dangerous Target
Tracked radar or reported AIS target with a predicted CPA and TCPA that violates values preset by the user. The
respective target is marked by a “dangerous target” symbol.
Dead-Reckoned Position (DR)
Position extrapolated from the last accepted position update, based on present course and speed, and updated on a
time interval selected by the operator.
Degrade
Reduce the quantity or quality of information content.
Display Base
The chart content as listed in Annex A and which cannot be removed from the display. It is not intended to be
sufficient for safe navigation.
Display Redraw Time
Interval from when the display starts to change until the new display is complete.
Display Regeneration Time
Interval from operator action until the consequent redraw is complete.
Display Scale
Ratio between a distance on the display and a distance on the ground, normalized and expressed as, for example,
1:10 000.

16 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Preamble • Definitions and Abbreviations

Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)

Navigation information system which with adequate backup arrangements can be accepted as complying with the
up-to-date chart required by regulation V/19 and V/27 of the 1974 SOLAS Convention, as amended, by displaying
selected information from a system electronic navigational chart (SENC) with positional information from navigation
sensors to assist the mariner in route planning and route monitoring, and if required display additional navigation
related information.
Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC)
The database, standardized as to content, structure and format, issued for use with ECDIS by or on the authority of a
Government authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant government institution, and conform to IHO standards.
ENC Cell
The basic unit of ENC data covering a defined geographical area bounded by two meridians and two parallels
ENC Data
Data conforming Electronic Navigational Chart (ENC)
ENC Test Data Set
Standardized data set and testing instructions available as IHO S-64.
Estimated position (EP)
Position extrapolated from the last accepted position update, based on present course and speed (STW), including
effects of wind, tide, current, and updated on a time interval selected by the operator.
Fix
Position of own ship determined, without reference to any former position, by the common intersection of two or
more LOPs.
Important Indication
Indication that is displayed visually and continuously, which needs special attention and cannot be removed from the
display other than by eliminating the cause of the indication.
Indication
Display of regular information and conditions, not part of alert management.
Line of Position (LOP)
Plotted line on which own ship is located determined by observation or measurement of the range or bearing to an aid
to navigation or other charted element.
Lost Target
Tracked radar or reported AIS target for which the system is no longer receiving valid position data.
Non-ENC Data
Data not conforming to ENC data.
Official
By, or on authority of a government, authorized Hydrographic Office or other relevant government institution.
Overscale
Display of the chart information at a display scale larger than the compilation scale.
Presentation Library
Implementation of the display specifications in IHO S-52, Annex A, by de-coding and symbolizing the SENC.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 17

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Readily Available Indication

Indication that can be, at any moment, immediately displayed by a single operator action.
Raster Chart Display System (RCDS)
A navigation information system displaying RNCs with positional information from navigation sensors to assist the
mariner in route planning and route monitoring and, if required, display additional navigation-related information.
Raster Navigational Chart (RNC)
A facsimile of a paper chart originated by, or distributed on the authority of, a government-authorized Hydrographic
Office.
RTS
Reported Target Simulator as defined in Annex F of IEC.
Route
Series of waypoints connected by one or more legs including both straight and curved segments.
RNC Data
Data Conforming to Raster Chart Display System (RCDS).
RNC Test Data Set
Standardized data set and testing instructions available as IHO S-64.
Single Operator Action
Procedure achieved by no more than one hard-key or soft-key action, excluding any necessary cursor movements,
or voice actuation using programmed codes.
Safety Contour
Borderline between safe and unsafe water based on depth defined by the mariner.
Safety Depth
Depth defined by the mariner, e.g. the ships draught plus under keel clearance, to be used by ECDIS to emphasise
sounding on the display equal to or less than this value.
Selected Target
Target selected manually or automatically for the display of detailed alphanumeric data, information and text in a
separate user dialogue area. The target is represented by a “selected target” symbol.
Sleeping AIS Target
AIS target indicating the presence of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. The target is represented by a
“sleeping target” symbol indicating the vessel’s orientation. No additional information is presented until the AIS target
is activated.
Standard Display
The display mode intended to be used as a minimum during route planning and route monitoring.
System Electronic Navigational Chart (SENC)
A database in the manufacturer’s internal ECDIS format, resulting from the lossless transformation of the entire
ENC contents and updates.
System Raster Navigational Chart (SRNC)
A database resulting from the transformation of the RNC by the RCDS to include updates to the RNC by appropriate
means.

18 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Preamble • Purpose of ECDIS Task

Purpose of ECDIS Task

The main purpose of the ECDIS task is to:
● display of electronic charts;
● display the ship position on the electronic chart;
● monitor approach to dangers to navigation plotted on electronic vector charts or on a map created by navigator;
● plan a route and draw a schedule of proceeding along this route;
● accomplish various kinds of navigational tasks (Navtex database, Tide & Currents database, SAR routes).

The ECDIS task is compliant with the IHO Standards which are specified on the website
https://www.wartsila.com/docs/default-source/marine-documents/transas/software-compliance-with-iho-
standards.pdf.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 19

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

ECDIS User Interface

This chapter describes principles of building the ECDIS user Interface

ECDIS User Interface Structure 22

Main and Dual Chart Panels 23
User Interface Components 26
Panels 26
Pages 27
Control Panel Windows 28
List Box Menu 28
Text Boxes 28
Buttons 29
Radio Buttons 29
Indicators 29
Progress Bars 30
ECDIS Task Control Panel 30
COG/SOG/HDG/STW Window 31
Alerts Window 32
Application Window 32
Position Dropped Window 32
Sensors Window 33
Vectors Window 33
Network Window 33
Indications Window 34
Time Window 34
Primary Window 35
Secondary Window 35
Charts Area Window 36
Display Panel Window 36
Operational Window 37
EBL/VRM/CHL Window 37
Information Window 37
Abbreviations Used in the User Interface 38
Use of Uniform Measurement Units 39

20 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface •

Keyboard 40
Virtual Keyboard 42

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 21

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

ECDIS User Interface Structure

In the ECDIS task, to enable the display of electronic charts and associated information, Main and Dual panels are
used. The essential and other data and control tools are arranged on the Control panel. The rest of information and
functionality for the control of the ECDIS environment is contained on functional panels. The panel layout can be
presented diagrammatically as shown below:
● For 19, 23 inch monitors:

● For 24, 26 and 27 inch monitors:

For the Conning Panel windows description, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v.
3.02.350). Additional Functions, Chapter 3.

22 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • ECDIS User Interface Structure

Main and Dual Chart Panels

The Main panel is always displayed on the ECDIS task screen. The Dual panel or only one functional panel can be
displayed simultaneously with the Main panel.
You can change vertical dimensions of functional panels and of the Dual chart panel by using the cursor. As the
cursor is positioned on the bottom boundary of the Main panel, it will change its form, then get hold of the boundary
and set it at the desired height. If the two Chart panels are arranged vertically, this functionality is retained for altering
horizontal dimensions (this arrangement is possible for Chart panels only).

The Main panel is the principal Chart panel.

The Dual panel is an additional Chart panel where the ship symbol is permanently displayed. The panel is not
displayed if any of functional panels are turned on (activated), and vice versa: when it is displayed, no functional
panels can be seen.
The panels consists of two areas:
● Chart Area;
● Toolbar.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 23

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Chart Areas
The Chart Area of each panel (Main and Dual) is designed for the following purposes:
● to display electronic charts showing classes of chart information (determined on the Charts panel);
● to display the ownship symbol with motion vectors;
● to display the route loaded for proceeding by in the Navigation Mode;
● to display the AIS objects (only the Main panel).

Displayed in the top left corner of the Chart Area is the panel orientation symbol : an arrow showing direction to
the north.

The bottom right corner of the electronic chart displays an angle shaped indicator .
The line is a graphic presentation of the maximum possible error of plotting objects on the chart. When a chart is
displayed on the scale of the original, the linear size of the error is taken to be 2 mm. As the scale is growing, the
linear dimensions of the indicator increase showing to which extent the chart information can be relied on.

Toolbars
The Main chart panel toolbar contains the following control buttons:

- to return to the display of the ownship symbol;

- to set the ship symbol in the position of the cursor which appears when this mode is turned on;

- to select chart display orientation (North Up/Head Up/Course Up);

- to select the ship symbol motion mode (True/Relative);

- to increase the chart display scale by a fixed scale value;

- to decrease the chart display scale by a fixed scale value;

- to display the chart on the original scale;

- to call the Info cursor for obtaining information;

- to display HCRF format chart viewing panel;

- to turn on/off Quick Distance Tool and select the mode of distance measurement;

- to turn on the display of the chart over the radar picture;

- to open the Integrator toolbar;

- to select the screen colour palette to suit the outside illumination;

24 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • ECDIS User Interface Structure

- to turn on/off virtual keyboard.

- to load (create/edit) User Configurations;

- to turn on/off the MOB mode.

The Dual chart panel toolbar contains the following control buttons:

- to return to the display of the ownship symbol;

- to set the ship symbol in the position of the cursor which appears when this mode is turned on;

- to select chart display orientation (North Up/Head Up/Course Up);

- to select the ship symbol motion mode (True/Relative);

- to increase the chart display scale by a fixed scale value;

- to decrease the chart display scale by a fixed scale value;

- to display the chart on the original scale;

- to turn on the Auto Zoom function;

- to arrange Chart panels horizontally;

- to arrange Chart panels vertically;

- to turn on the Docking Mode;

- to turn on the history of the Docking Mode.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 25

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

User Interface Components

Panels
There is direct access to panels from the task. For the ECDIS task, this is primarily the Control panel, which shows
operational information and contains the most important task controls.
In the ECDIS task, apart from the Control panel, there are 13 functional panels, each designed for its special
purpose within the ECDIS task:

Panels (except the Control panel) are switched with tabs in the bottom part of the screen.
For the operator’s convenience, the system implements a function for saving the current condition of the Main chart
panel when the functional panels are switched. This function’s operation can be shown in a table:

PANEL NAME TO OPEN PANEL TO SWITCH THE OPEN PANEL WITH THE TAB

Main A S
Dual S H
AIS A H
Charts P K
Config P P
Log Book P K
Man Corr L K
Maps L K
Monitoring P P
Navtex L K
Overlays P K
Route Planning L* K
Sensors L K
Targets A H
Tasks L K

26 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • User Interface Components

where:

the vessel is displayed on the ECDIStask screen, Ahead, Autoload and Autoscale functions performed
A –
automatically; orientation setting is North, motion setting is True;
the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel is saved along with the last orientation (North/Head/Course)
H –
and motion (True/Relative) settings which were made on this panel before;
the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel which was set on this panel before it is saved; orientation
K –
setting is North, motion setting is True;
the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel which was set in the previous active functional panel is
L –
saved; orientation setting is North, motion setting is True;
for the Route Planning panel only: if a route has been selected, the focusing on the edited route is made
L* –
automatically;
the ship is displayed on the screen, the Ahead function performed automatically; the last Chart panel
S –
orientation (North/Head/Course) and motion (True/Relative) settings are retained;
the display (chart boundaries) of the Chart panel is saved along with the last orientation (North/Head/Course)
P –
and motion (True/Relative) settings which were made on the previous active functional panel.

Pages
If functionality which the panel is intended for, is rather extensive, for the convenience sake it is divided into pages.
The purpose of pages corresponds to the individual tasks within the panel functionality. In the ECDIS task, panels
are divided into pages. They are switched by using tabs in the top part of the panel which they belong to. Shown
below is the Sensors panel with pages intended for selection of essential information sensors: Ship Position,
Heading, Speed and Echosounder:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 27

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Control Panel Windows

The Control panel consists of windows. Each window serves for the display of some operational information, or
contains the most frequently used task controls. Graphically, windows are divided with special lines. The sample
below shows some Control panel windows of the main tasks.

ECDIS Control panel has the Multipanel window which allows setting different displays serving for
accomplishment of operational tasks. Displays are selected from the drop-down list opened by pressing the button
with the name of the currently set panel.

List Box Menu

The list box menus serve for selecting the necessary name or value from the list. The list box menus have a form of
a button with an arrow. A press on the button opens a menu which the selection is made from. The selected name or
value is shown on the button after the menu is closed:

Text Boxes
Text boxes are used for entering values or names:

Input of names is made from ES6 keyboard. Values can be entered from the keyboard or by using the trackball.

28 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • User Interface Components

The trackball motion in the vertical direction produces fast change of a value in the text box, whereas the horizontal
motion results in much slower change. In some text boxes, all you have to do after the input of the necessary value
is press the left trackball button for the program to accept the entered value. In other text boxes, to exit from the input
mode it will be necessary to press the right trackball button and confirm the entered value:

Buttons
Buttons are designed for activating some functions. If a button is greyed, the operation of the corresponding function
is not available in the mode in question. Buttons may be of the following types:

BUTTON PRESSED BUTTON RELEASED BUTTON GREYED

Push-to-lock buttons

Buttons without locking

If to be turned on, certain functionality needs input of a parameter value which will be monitored, the button will be
greyed until this parameter value is entered.

PARAMETER VALUE IS NOT PARAMETER VALUE IS ENTERED,

FUNCTION IS SWITCHED ON
ENTERED THE FUNCTION IS NOT SWITCHED ON

Radio Buttons
These buttons serve for selecting one function only from the offered set:

Indicators
Indicators show a level for the value set by using the buttons placed next to them:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 29

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Progress Bars
The progress bars show the degree to which the program has completed the operation run by the user:

ECDIS Task Control Panel

The ECDIS task Control panel consists of a number of windows. Windows are displayed near the Chart panel. In
addition, some of the displayed windows can be moved (by dragging them with the cursor or by double clicking the
left trackball button in the window area) onto the Chart panel. To return the window to its place, press the button.
If the Control panel does not contain any windows, the area is filled with chart information.
The control panel contains the Display Panel window which is intended for the display of various data types. The
window consists of nineteen displays:
● AIS Messages;
● Checklist;
● Environment Data;
● Ice charts;
● MOB (Man Over Board);
● Manually Fix Position;
● Monitoring and Advisor;
● Navigator;
● Parallel Index Lines;
● Precision Instruments;
● Radar Settings;
● Route Data;
● Sensor Data/Status;
● Special Purpose Objects;
● Sun / Moon;
● System Information;
● TRIAL/TGT Simulator;
● Targets;
● User Configurations (displayed only in the Multipanel window).
The displays are selected from the list opened by pressing the button with the name of one of displays in the top part
of the window (except for the MOB and User Configurations displays).

The button to the right of the Display Panel window is intended for displaying additional Multipanel window on
the ECDIS task Chart panel. The system enables simultaneous independent operation with information displays
selected in both windows.

30 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • ECDIS Task Control Panel

COG/SOG/HDG/STW Window

COG/SOG/HDG/STW window is designed for the display of ship motion parameters. The panel displays the
following parameters:
● HDG – course from gyrocompass;
● STW – ship speed through the water.

NOTE: Only longitudinal part if DLOG is selected.

● COG – ship course over the ground;

● SOG – ship speed over the ground.

NOTE: Calculated part (longitudinal and transversal) if DLOG is selected.

The data source is specified to the right of the own ship motion parameter name:
● GYRO1 – gyrocompass with a digital input, its number specified;
● MAG – magnetic compass with a digital input;
● GPS1 – GPS (DGPS), its number specified;
● ER – echo reference mode;
● DR – dead reckoning mode;
● MAN – manual input;
● LOG1 – log (Speed Through Water) with a digital output, its number specified;
● DLOG1 – Doppler log, its number specified;
● NONE – no source available.

As a free cursor is positioned on the source name, the source alias entered in the System Configuration utility is
displayed on the pop-up prompt window.

If there is an offset to the gyro, the window displays corrected heading and a special symbol: the yellow triangle. As
a free cursor is positioned on this triangle, the correction value is displayed on the pop-up prompt window.
For the data display principles, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v.
3.02.350).Functional Description, Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Display of Navigational
(Essential) Information.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 31

 Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Alerts Window

The Alerts window is intended for displaying the alarms, warning and cautions. The window contains the following
units:

●
- to open a list of generated alarms;

●
- to open a list of generated warnings;

●
- to open a list of generated cautions.

Given below is an example of a caution:

Category A alerts from the RADAR source can be acknowledged in the RADAR task (Navi-Radar 4000 application)
only. Category A alerts from the ECDIS source can be acknowledged in the ECDIS task (Navi-Sailor 4000 application)
only. Even if it is not permitted to acknowledge an alarm in the ECDIS or RADAR task, it will nonetheless be displayed
in the task’s alert list. An alert which cannot be acknowledged is shown with the or icons (“Can’t be
acknowledged”):

.
For more detailed description of the alerts display, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS
(v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section Display of Alerts and section Alert Management Principles,
paragraph General).

Application Window

The Applications window is intended for loading/switching MFD applications:

● ECDIS – to turn on/switch to the ECDIS task;
● CID – to turn on/switch to the Conning Information Dispaly task;
● NPL – to turn on/switch to the Navi-Planner 4000.

Position Dropped Window

The window contains the following controls:

● Position Dropped – button with the message meaning that the ship symbol is not displayed on the chart. With a
press on the button, the display of the ship symbols is restored. After the restoration of the ship symbol display
(also with the use of Ahead function), Wärtsilä logo appears in the place of a message.

32 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • ECDIS Task Control Panel

Sensors Window

The Sensors window is intended for the display of information from different sources. The window contains the
following controls:
● X-1 – to select a scanner which the radar picture is supplied from;
● Overlay – to turn on the radar overlay information display on the electronic chart in the ECDIS;
● AIS – to turn on the display of AIS targets;
● ARPA – to turn on the display of information on targets processed by the ARPA and to select ARPA target
sources.

Vectors Window

The Vectors window is designed for the display of the following parameters:
● AIS filter - to promptly open the AIS page of the Targets display on the Control panel. If the sleeping AIS targets
filtering is enabled, or the display of some AIS target type it turned off (the filter is on this page), the button name is
shown in yellow (see also document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional
Description, Chapter 4, section Indications, paragraph Display of Important Indications);

● VECT: T GND - indication showing the AIS targets vector mode and stabilization mode (see also document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section
Indications, paragraph Display of Important Indications);
● Vectors – to call a menu for setting lengths of the own ship and target motion vectors; the Fixed option allows a
constant vector length to be set (in proportion to the screen size), the rest – by the set time value (in minutes, 1–
24 min).

Network Window

The Network window is intended for displaying the station name and status in the network and, in the case of the
MASTER status, also the transfer of rights to other stations in the network. The window contains the following
control:
● (W01) MASTER – to display the station name and status in the network.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 33

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Indications Window

The Indications window is designed for the display of indications.

As a new indication appears, the drop-down list button displays the sign. Press the button for familiarizing
yourself with all the indications.

As a free cursor is positioned on the Default Safety Contour indication, more detailed explanation for this indication
is displayed in the pop-up prompt window.

For more detailed description of the indications display, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section Indications, paragraph Display of Indications.

Time Window

The Time window is intended for the display of the current time. There may be two types of time values in the
window: UTC and ship’s time. To switch between them, press the button with a picture of the clock face (ship time if
the button is pressed, UTC if it is released):

The window contains the following elements:

● UTC/Ship’s – information on which time is currently displayed;
● 00:00 W/E – time zone or the difference between the ship time and UTC (not displayed if UTC is selected); the
format is hh:mm;
● 01-01-01 – display of the current date according to the selected time type; the format is dd-mm-yy;
● 00:00:00 – display of the current time; the format is hh:mm:ss.

34 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • ECDIS Task Control Panel

Primary Window

The Primary window is intended for the display of the primary positioning system and coordinates obtained from it.
For the principles of displaying primary positioning data, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Display of
Navigational (Essential) Information.

The position source is specified in the left bottom part of the window. As a free cursor is positioned on the position
source name, the source alias entered in the System Configuration utility is displayed in the pop-up prompt window.

With the GPS operating in the differential mode, the prefix “D” is added before its name.

If there is an offset to the ship position coordinates, the window displays corrected coordinates and a special
symbol: the yellow triangle. As a free cursor is positioned on this triangle, the correction value is displayed in the
pop-up prompt window.
If the RMC (IEC 61162 ed.4) message is available, the MFD processes it and displays navigational status in the
Primary window. The colour in which the coordinates value is shown indicates the position quality:
● Black – safe;
● Orange – caution;
● Orange – unsafe (this event is recorded in the Log Book).

SAFE CAUTION UNSAFE

Secondary Window

The Secondary window is intended for the display of the secondary positioning system, and the bearing and range
to the position obtained for the Primary positioning system. For the principles of displaying secondary positioning
system data, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description,
Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Display of Navigational (Essential) Information.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 35

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The position source is specified in the left part of the window. As a free cursor is positioned on the position source
name, the source alias entered in the System Configuration utility is displayed in the pop-up prompt window.

With the GPS operating in the differential mode, the prefix “D” is added before its name.

If there is an offset to the ship position coordinates, the window displays corrected coordinates and a special
symbol: the yellow triangle. As a free cursor is positioned on this triangle, the correction value is displayed in the
pop-up prompt window.

Charts Area Window

The Charts Area window is designed for the adjustment of the chart display on the chart panel:
● Chart number – to call a menu with a list of charts under the ship position (if the ship symbol is displayed on the
chart) or the list of all the charts available in the ship folio; shown on the button is the current chart number;
● Autoload – to turn on the function for the automatic loading of charts; there is an indicator to the right of the
button:
● ON – the function is turned on (the Autoload button is greyed);
● OFF – the function is turned off;
● FIX – to fix the current chart.
● Last upd. – date of the most recent chart updating in dd-mm-yyyy format;
● Updated to – the media which was used for the latest updating of TX-97 or SENC chart collection.

Display Panel Window

The Display Panel window is intended for the display of various data types.

36 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • ECDIS Task Control Panel

The window consists of displays which are selected from the list opened by pressing the button with the name of one
of the displays in the top part of the window.

Button to the right of the Display Panel window is intended for displaying additional Multipanel window on the
ECDIS task Chart panel. The system enables simultaneous independent operation with information displays
selected in both windows.

Operational Window

The window contains the following functional buttons:

● STD DISP – to turn on the display of objects included in the standard display;
● Event – to make a manual entry of data in the electronic ship log book for the current moment, and to place a
special mark on the ownship track.

EBL/VRM/CHL Window

The EBL-VRM1 and EBL-VRM1 pages of the window are intended for turning on and adjusting two independent
electronic measurement tools. The window contains the following units:
● EBL 1(2) – to turn on EBL 1(2), true or relative;
● VRM 1(2) – to turn on VRM 1(2);
● OFF SET – to turn on the shift of EBL/VRM 1(2) reference point;
● Fixed – to fix EBL/VRM 1(2) reference point relative to the ground (operates in the OFFSET mode only).

The CHLpage of the window duplicates functionality from the CHL page of the Precision Instruments display of
Display Panel window (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Additional
Functions, Chapter 1, section Precision Instruments, paragraph Using the Curved Heading Line). All the buttons and
fields are synchronised. The page contains the following parameters:
● 1 – to turn on the display of the 1 Curved Heading Line on the ECDIS task screen;
● 2 – to turn on the display of the 2 Curved Heading Line on the ECDIS task screen;
● Active 1/2 – to switch between the Carry and Drop modes for 1/2 Curved Heading Lines;
● N CTW – ship course after the turn and buttons for its setting;
● Radius – ship turn radius.

Information Window

This window includes:

● Depth in Metres – information on the depth measurement units used in the ECDIS task;
● WGS-84 – to warn that the ECDIS uses charts based on WGS-84 datum.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 37

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Abbreviations Used in the User Interface

The ECDIS task use the following abbreviations:

ABBREVIATION FULL NAME ABBREVIATION FULL NAME

AIS Automatic Identification System H Up Head Up

ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid HDG Heading
BRG Bearing LOG (DLOG) Log (Doppler Log)
BWOL Bearing to Wheel over Line LOP Line Of Position
BWW Bearing waypoint to waypoint N Up North Up
C Up Course Up PS Positioning System
CMG Course Made Good PTA Planning Time of Arrival
COG Course Over Ground RAD Radius
CPA Closest Point of Approach R Range LOP’s
CRS Route leg course RM Relative Motion
DIST Distance RNG Range
DR Dead Reckoning ROT Rate Of Turn
DWOL Distance to Wheel over Line SMG Speed Made Good
ENC Electronic Navigational Chart SOG Speed Over Ground
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival STG Speed To Go
EBL Electronic Bearing Line STW Speed Through the Water
Time to Closest Point of
EP Estimated Position TCPA
Approach
ER Echo Reference TM True Motion
ECHO Echosounder TTG Time To Go
Global Orbiting Navigation
Satellite System (Differential
GLO (DGLO) V Visual Bearing LOP’s
Global Orbiting Navigation
Satellite System)
Global Orbiting Navigation
GLONASS Satellite System (Differential
VR Visual/Range LOP’s
(DGLONASS) Global Orbiting Navigation
Satellite System)
Global Positioning System
GPS (DGPS) (Differential Global Positioning VRM Variable Range Marker
System)
GYRO Gyrocompass WPT Way Point
GZ Guard Zone XTD Cross Track Distance

38 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • Use of Uniform Measurement Units

Use of Uniform Measurement Units

In the ECDIS task, measurement units are set by default and can be changed by the operator on the Units page of
the Config panel (see Chapter 3, section Setting of Measurement Units). The following units and their shortened
names are used:

PHYSICAL VALUE MEASUREMENT UNIT ABBREVIATION

Knot kn
Ship and target speed
Kilometre per hour km/h
Nautical mile NM
Kilometre km
Distances
Statute mile stm
Hectometre hm
Metre m
Precision Distances Feet ft
Yard yrd
Metre m
Depth/Height Feet ft
Fathom fm
Metre m
Draught
Feet ft
Metre per second m/s
Wind speed Knot kn
Kilometre per hour km/h
Degree Celsius °C
Temperature
Degree Fahrenheit °F

The ECDIS task uses geographic coordinates calculated on the basis of WGS 84 datum only.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 39

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Keyboard
The ECDIS task ES6 and ES8 keyboards are intended for the information input and task control.
The ECDIS task ES6 keyboard is presented below:

The ECDIS task ES8 keyboard is presented below:

Provided below is a table which specifies the ECDIS tasks and ES6/ES8 keyboards corresponding controls.

FUNCTION KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD ES8 ECDIS GUI

Ownship motion
modes

Zoom In

Zoom Out

Ahead

Event

40 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS User Interface • Keyboard

FUNCTION KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD ES8 ECDIS GUI

Overlay

Targets

MOB

Ownship presentation
modes

EBL

VRM

Gain

Sea

Rain

Standard Display

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 41

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

FUNCTION KEYBOARD ES6 KEYBOARD ES8 ECDIS GUI

Show All Layers

Alarm

Palette

Opening of Integrator
toolbar

Virtual Keyboard
Where a trackball only is available in the MFD configuration, the use of a virtual keyboard is provided for.

To display the virtual keyboard, press the button in the Chart panel toolbar.
The button is not shown in the toolbar of the Chart panel unless it was activated in the System Configuration utility
during the installation (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation
Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration,paragraph Workstation Settings ).

The virtual keyboard is shown in the bottom part of the Control panel and can be moved within it. To do this, position
the free cursor on the virtual keyboard as shown below, and press the left trackball button. Holding the left trackball
button, move the virtual keyboard to the necessary place so that it does not obscure the necessary input box.
There are two ways to close the virtual keyboard:

● Press the button in the top right corner of the virtual keyboard;

● Release the button in the Chart panel toolbar.

42 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Turning On/Off •

ECDIS Task Turning On/Off

This chapter describes the procedure used for starting/exiting from the MFD.

Turning ECDIS Task On 44

Turning ECDIS Task Off 45

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 43

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Turning ECDIS Task On

Each WS is started by pressing the On/Off button on its console.

The Integrator window will be loaded.

Tasks can be equally well switched and started in the following ways:
1. From the ES6 keyboard. To turn on the ECDIS task, press the <ECDIS> key on the ES6 keyboard.
2. From the Control panel. All the tasks use identical task-switching user interface implemented as buttons with
task names.

ECDIS CONNING INFORMATION DISPLAY

3. From the Integrator. To turn on the ECDIS task from the Integrator utility, press the ECDIS button .

44 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Turning On/Off • Turning ECDIS Task Off

The following window will be displayed on the WS upon the start of the ECDIS task loading.

After the program loading, the ECDIS task screen will be displayed.

Turning ECDIS Task Off

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel, which will open up, to switch to the General page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 45

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Exit button in the right-hand part of the panel: confirmation window will appear.

Press Yes to confirm exit from the program.

The program will be closed.

46 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control •

ECDIS Task Control

This chapter describes the general procedure used in the operation of the ECDIS task.

Transfer of Rights 48
Turning On/Off Control and Conning Panels Display on ECDIS Task Screen 48
Setting Control Panel Windows Display 50
Setting of Measurement Units 51
ECDIS Task Screen Configuration 52
Setting of Screen Colour Palette 52
Setting of Screen Graphic Presentation 53
Switching Graphic Cursor Type 53
Setting of Screen Boundaries Re-Draw as the Ship Symbol Approaches Them 54
Chart Panel Settings 54
Setting of Main and Dual Panel Displays 54
Setting of Ship Symbol on Chart Panel by Cursor Position 56
Setting Chart Panel Orientation 56
Setting Ship Symbol Motion Modes 57
Setting Ship Display and Its Motion Parameters on ECDIS Task Screen 57
Setting of Lengths of Own Ship and Target Vectors 58
Setting Time Zone 58
Setting Current Time Zone 59
Setting Time Zone Change 59
Use of ECDIS Task Tools 60
Return of Own Ship Symbol Display to ECDIS Task Screen 60
Viewing Charts 60
ERBL 61
Zoom 62
EBL/VRM 62
Index Lines 63
Quick Distance Tool 65
Manual Entry in the Ship Log 66
Handling ECDIS Task Configurations 67
Using Local User Configuration 67
Using Bridge User Configuration 71

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 47

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Transfer of Rights
On the ECDIS task with the MASTER status in the Network window of the Control panel, press MASTERand
select Change MASTER station from the drop-down list.

Press the Yes button in the window which will appear to confirm the transfer of rights to another WS.

On ECDIS task with the SLAVE status, press the Take Over Control button in the Network window of the Control
panel.

As this button is pressed on one of WS’s, all the rights are transferred to this station. The former MASTERstation
will have the SLAVE status. If the Take Over Control button was not pressed on any of the stations during the
transfer of rights, all the rights remain with the station, which the transfer of rights was initiated from (see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 10, section ECDIS
Master and Slave).

Turning On/Off Control and Conning Panels Display

on ECDIS Task Screen
To turn off the Control panel display on the ECDIS task screen, press the button in the right part of the tabs zone.

48 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Turning On/Off Control and Conning Panels Display on ECDIS Task Screen

To re-display the Control panel, press the button in the right part of the tabs zone of the ECDIS task screen.

To turn on the Conning panel display on the ECDIS task screen, press the button in the left part of the tabs
zone.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 49

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Conning Panel contains three Screen Views (see also document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Additional Functions, Chapter 3, section Conning Task Structure), which are formed according
to their functional purpose from the viewpoint of navigation:
● Instruments;
● Route;
● Docking.

To turn off the Conning panel press the button in the left part of the tabs zone of the ECDIS task screen.

Setting Control Panel Windows Display

Set the order of the panel windows display by “dragging” them as required to the Chart panel.

To return windows to the Control panel, press the button in the top right corner of each window.

50 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Setting of Measurement Units

Setting of Measurement Units

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the Units page:

Press the button next to the physical value name.

From the drop-down list, select the necessary measurement unit.

Create a necessary configuration for all the measurement units (for the list of available units see in Chapter 1,
section Use of Uniform Measurement Units).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 51

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

ECDIS Task Screen Configuration

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the General page:

Setting of Screen Colour Palette

The Palette group is designed for selecting the screen colour palette to suit the outside illumination:
● Daylight;
● Dusk – night with moon;
● Night – moonless night;
● Night inverted – moonless night (Control panel text inverse colour).

For S-57 format charts, three palettes are used: Daylight (Daylight), Dusk (Dusk) and Night (Night and Night
inverted).
In the Palette group, press the button with the name of the set screen colour palette.

52 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • ECDIS Task Screen Configuration

In the list which will open up, select the necessary menu line to set the screen colour palette.

ATTENTION! Use of the brightness control may inhibit visibility of information at night.

There is another way to switch palettes. Press successively <DAY/NT> on the ES6 keyboard. Palettes will be
switched in the order of their arrangement in the Palette group of the General page.

Setting of Screen Graphic Presentation

The Skin group is designed for selecting the screen graphic presentation:
● No skin;
● Black;
● Carbon;
● Elastic;
● Metallic;
● Plastic.
In the Skin group, press the button with the name of the set screen graphic presentation.

Switching Graphic Cursor Type

The graphics cursor is used during the operation of some of ECDIS task functions and represents an intersection of
lines corresponding to the latitude and longitude of the given point, but the form of the graphics cursor can be
changed as required. The Chart panel cursor group serves for setting the following types of the graphics cursor:

● Short – the cursor is shown in the form of a small cross;

● Long – the cursor is shown in the form of an intersection of two lines across the entire Chart
panel.

In the Chart panel cursor group, select the appropriate checkbox to select the graphic cursor type.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 53

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting of Screen Boundaries Re-Draw as the Ship

Symbol Approaches Them
The Display Reset to group is used for setting the calculated screen redraw boundaries – percentage ratio of the
screen length and distance from the ship symbol to the screen boundary (10–90 per cent).

Use the input window in the Display reset to group to set the ratio (in per cent) between the screen length and
distance from the ship symbol to the screen boundary.
As the ship symbol approaches the screen boundary so that the set ratio is fulfilled, the screen will be re-drawn.

Chart Panel Settings

Setting of Main and Dual Panel Displays
To enable the display of electronic charts and associated information, the Main and Dual panels are used.
You can change vertical dimensions of the Main and Dual chart panels by using the cursor. As the cursor is
positioned on the bottom boundary of the Main panel, it will change its form, then get hold of the boundary and set it
at the desired height. If the two Chart panels are arranged vertically, this functionality is retained for altering
horizontal dimensions (this arrangement is possible for Chart panels only).
Use the tab in the lower part of the ECDIS task screen to switch to the Dual panel.
This panel is an additional Chart panel where the ship symbol is permanently displayed. The panel is not displayed if
any of functional panels are turned on (activated), and vice versa: when it is displayed, no functional panels can be
seen.
The Chart Area of the Main and Dual panels is designed for the following purposes:
● to display electronic charts showing classes of chart information (determined on the Charts panel);
● to display the ownship symbol with motion vectors;
● to display the route loaded for proceeding by in the Navigation mode;
● to display the targets and AIS objects.

Displayed in the top left corner of the Chart area is the panel orientation symbol: an arrow showing direction to
the north.

The bottom right corner of the electronic chart displays an angle shaped indicator .
The line is a graphic presentation of the maximum possible error of plotting objects on the chart. When a chart is
displayed on the scale of the original, the linear size of the error is taken to be 2 mm. As the scale is growing, the
linear dimensions of the indicator increase showing to which extent the chart information can be relied on.

54 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Chart Panel Settings

By default, the Main and “Dual panels are displayed vertically, which corresponds tothe depressed button on
the Dual panel.

To change the order in which the Chart panels are displayed, press the button on the Dual panel.

The display of panels will change.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 55

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting of Ship Symbol on Chart Panel

by Cursor Position
To set the ship symbol in the relative motion mode in any point of the Chart panel, press the button. Position the
graphics cursor which will appear, in the place within the Chart panel convenient for the ship symbol display.

Press the left trackball button. The Chart panel will be re-drawn so that the ship symbol is in the place indicated with
the cursor.

Setting Chart Panel Orientation

Set the Chart panel orientation by pressing the button in the Chart panel toolbar :

● - for the orientation to the north

● - for the orientation by the compass heading;

● - for the orientation by the direction of the current leg of the monitored route.
There is another way of setting the Chart panel orientation. Press successively the <N/H/C UP> key on the ES6
keyboard. The Chart panel orientation will be switched in the specified order.

56 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Chart Panel Settings

Setting Ship Symbol Motion Modes

To select the ship symbol motion mode, press the button in the toolbar of the Chart panel:

● - to select relative motion mode;

● - to select true motion mode.

There is another way to select the ship symbol motion mode. Press successively the <TM/RM> key on ES6
keyboard. The ship symbol motion mode will be changed to the reverse.

Setting Ship Display and Its Motion Parameters

on ECDIS Task Screen
Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel, which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page:

To turn on/off the display of own ship and its motion parameters, press the following buttons in the Ship group:
● Headline – to display the own ship compass heading line;
● COG vector – to display the motion vector (over the ground);
● HDG vector – to display the vector of motion relative to the water (log speed and compass heading).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 57

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Select from the drop-down lists the following settings:

● Ship by … – to display the own ship (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v.
3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3, section Ship Motion Data, paragraph Ship Symbol on the Electronic
Charts) on the Chart panel as:
● symbol – the ship symbol (regardless of the scale);
● contour – the ship contour (when the current screen scale is commensurate with the ship dimensions).
● Align by … – to switch orientation (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v.
3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3, section Ship Motion Data, paragraph Own Ship Motion Vectors) of
the own ship symbol display along:
● HDG – the vector of the ship’s motion as per the heading detector (gyro) reading;
● COG – the ship’s true motion (COG) vector.

● Wind vector – to select true wind vector display mode (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 2, section Other Sensors, paragraph Wind Interface).

Setting of Lengths of Own Ship and Target Vectors

Press vectors button in the Vectors window on the Control panel (the button shows the current vector length).

Select the required vector length (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 3, section Own Ship Motion Data, paragraph Own Ship Motion Vectors) from the list
which will open up and press the left trackball button.

Setting Time Zone

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

58 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Setting Time Zone

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the Time Zone page.

Setting Current Time Zone

The Current time zone settings group contains the following elements:
● UTC time – line for the display of the current UTC time;
● Ship’s time – line for the display of the current ship time;
● Time zone – line for the display of the time zone (difference between the current ship and UTC time).

Use the Time zone line to enter the ship’s time zone (from 14E to 12W). Press <ENTER>: the time zone value will
be set, whereas the ship time value in the Ship’s time line will change to suit the entered time zone.
As the ship time is entered in the Ship’s time line, the time zone will change in the Time zone line.

Setting Time Zone Change

The Schedule time zone change group contains the checkbox for enabling (checkbox selected) the change of time
zone function and a line for changing settings:
● Change at ship’s time – line for the input and display of the ship time when the time zone is required to be
changed (clock put forward/back);
● New ship’s time will be – line for the input and display of the new ship time;
● New time zone will be – line for the input and display of the new time zone.

Use the New time zone will be line of the Schedule time zone change group to set the new time zone value.
Press <ENTER>. Use the Change at ship time line to set the ship time value when the time zone is expected to
change.

Press the <ENTER> keyboard key. Select the activated Change at ship time checkbox. At the set time, the time
zone will be changed to suit the value entered for it.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 59

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use of ECDIS Task Tools

Return of Own Ship Symbol Display to ECDIS Task
Screen
There are three ways to return the own ship symbol display to the ECDIS task screen:

1. Press the Ahead button on the Chart panel toolbar.

2. Press the <AHEAD> key on the ES6 keyboard.
3. Press the STD DISP button in the Operational window of the Control panel.

The own ship symbol will appear on the ECDIS task screen: the screen is re-drawn so that the ship symbol moves in
the direction opposite to the current course.

ATTENTION! In the true motion mode, even if the ship symbol is available on the ECDIS task screen, the screen is
re-drawn relative to the ship symbol.

Viewing Charts
The standard View cursor (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 3, section ECDIS Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) is brought to the Chart
panel by pressing the right trackball button.
As the left trackball button is pressed, the Review function is turned on, whilst the cursor acquires the form of a

graphics cursor .
By moving the cursor with the trackball, view the necessary charts beyond the ECDIS task screen boundary. At this
stage, the Autoload function is required to be ON (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS
(v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 1, section Chart Control, paragraph Autoload).

60 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Use of ECDIS Task Tools

The graphics cursor coordinates are displayed in the Review information window in the bottom part of the Control
panel.

ERBL
The standard ERBL cursor (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 3, section ECDIS Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) is brought to the Chart
panel by pressing the right trackball button.

Coordinates from the ERBL (bearing and range to the selected point) are displayed in the information window in the
bottom part of the panel.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 61

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Zoom
The standard Zoom cursor (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 3, section ECDIS Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) is brought to the Chart
panel by pressing the right trackball button.
A press on the left trackball button turns on the Zoom function, whilst the cursor assumes the form of the graphics

cursor .
Position the graphics cursor which will appear, in the corner of the chart fragment required to be viewed. Press the
left trackball button. Select the required chart fragment by moving the cursor with the trackball.

Press the left trackball button. The Chart panel scale will change so that the selected chart fragment is fully
displayed on the Chart panel.

EBL/VRM
EBL/VRM/CHL window is intended for turning on and adjusting two independent electronic measurement tools.
EBL 1/VRM 1 are shown on the Chart panel as a dashed lines. EBL 2/VRM 2 are shown on the Chart panel as a
dashed lines with a different length of a dash.

62 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Use of ECDIS Task Tools

For the variable range marker (VRM) and electronic bearing line (EBL) to be displayed on the ECDIS task Chart
panel:
1. To display the first EBL/VRM pair onthe ECDIS task Chart panel, press the EBL 1 and VRM 1 buttons
respectively on the EBL/VRM 1page of the EBL/VRM/CHL window on the Control panel.

To display the second EBL/VRM pair on the ECDIS task Chart panel, press the EBL 2 and VRM 2 buttons on the
EBL/VRM 2 page respectively.
To set the base point offset of the first EBL/VRM pair relative to the ship position, press the OFFSET button. The
base point will move relative to the current ship position in bearing and distance specified in the EBL and VRM
boxes. By default (the Fixed button is depressed), the EBL/VRM during the offsetting will be referenced to the
selected point on the ground, i.e., it will be moving relative to the own ship at a SOG speed in the direction
opposite to the COG. If it is necessary that the EBL/VRM centre move together with the own ship, release the
Fixed button.
2. By turning <EBL> and <VRM> keys on ES6 keyboard, set the required EBL and VRM value. Press the <EBL/VRM>
key to change between EBL/VRM 1 and 2.

Index Lines
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 63

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the list which will open up, select the Parallel Index Lines line and press the left trackball button.

Press the button with the index line number. Position the free cursor in the Range input field and press the left
button.

By rolling the trackball, set the required value of distance from the centre of the own ship mark, or enter it from the
keyboard. Press the left trackball button. The index line will be set at the specified distance.

NOTE: Distance to the index line is measured along the perpendicular dropped from the own ship mark centre to the
index line.

Position the free cursor in the T BRG input field and press the left trackball button.

By rolling the trackball, set the required value of the index line bearing or enter it from the keyboard. Press the left
trackball button. The index line will be set in the specified direction.

NOTE: 0° bearing corresponds to the line direction to the north. The index line bearing varies from 0° to 360°. On the
reciprocal bearings, the line direction is the same, but it is located on different sides of the own ship mark.

To set the index line bearing value equal to the current ship course, press the Reset button.
To turn on/off the display of all the parallel index lines on the ECDIS task screen, press the Show All button.

64 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Use of ECDIS Task Tools

Quick Distance Tool

For the Quick Distance Tool operation, press the button on the Chart panel toolbar.

Select the necessary method of distance measurement.

Graphics cursor (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional
Description, Chapter 3, section ECDIS Task Cursors, paragraph Free Cursor) appears on the Chart panel.
Position the graphics cursor on the initial measurement point on the Chart panel and press the left trackball button.

Position the graphics cursor on the next point on the Chart panel and press the left trackball button. The distance
measured from the initial point and bearing from the initial to the set point will be shown on the Chart panel.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 65

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Set the necessary number of points for the distance measurements.

The information window in the bottom part of the Control panel displays the following data:
● Latitude 1/Longitude 1 – coordinates of the graphics cursor;
● Latitude 2/Longitude 2 – coordinates of the last set measurement point;
● Bearing/Opp. Bearing – bearing (reverse bearing from the last set point to the cursor);
● Range – distance from the last set point to the cursor;
● Total distance – total distance from the first set point to the cursor.

To exit from the graphics cursor mode, press the right trackball button.

Manual Entry in the Ship Log

There are two ways to make a ship log entry on the entire set of events as of the current moment:

● Press the Event button in the Operational window on the Chart panel:

● Press the <EVENT> key on the ES6 keyboard.

An entry will be made in the Electronic system log book, and a special mark will be made on the own ship track.

66 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Handling ECDIS Task Configurations

Handling ECDIS Task Configurations

Using Local User Configuration
Creating Local User Configuration

ATTENTION! The operator can create the Local User Configuration for the ECDIS or RADAR task on any WS.

Press the button on the Chart panel toolbar and select the button .
In the configuration loading window which will open up, press the Edit Config button in the Local column.

In the Multipanel window the User Configurations display will open up on the Local page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 67

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the New button.

After the New button has been pressed, the current SW settings and the Graphic User Interface panels situation are
saved automatically with the “Configuration X” name and are synchronized with all the running stations of the bridge
(for information which is saved during the Local User Configuration creation see document Multifunctional Display.
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3, section User Configurations).
Rename the Local User Configuration. To do this, double click the configuration name and type the necessary name.
Press the left trackball button.
If a configuration was loaded, and then some changes were made in the software settings, press the Save button to
save the modified configuration with the initial name.

68 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Handling ECDIS Task Configurations

Loading Local User Configuration

For loading the Local User Configuration, press the button on the Chart panel toolbar and select the button

.
In the configuration loading window which will open up, make a double click on the necessary configuration in the
Local column.

If some safety parameters are changed when the Local User Configuration is loaded, a special window will be
displayed on the ECDIS Master WS.

The New Parameters window displays the currently set parameters (Original Value) and parameters which will be
set as the result of loading the Local User Configuration (New Value).
By default, all the parameters are selected, this is why, after the OK button has been pressed, all the values loaded
from the Local User Configuration will be accepted. To keep the currently set parameter values, clear checkboxes
next to their names. Press OK.
For the list of parameters which the loaded values should be specified for (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-
Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3, section User Configurations).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 69

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Deleting Local User Configuration

For deleting Local User Configuration press the button on the Chart panel toolbar and select the button

.
In the configuration loading window which will open up, press the Edit Config button in the Local column.

In the Multipanel window the User Configurations panel will open up on the Local page.

Select the necessary Local User Configuration and press the Delete button.

In the window which will appear, press Yes to confirm the deleting the selected Local User Configuration.

70 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Handling ECDIS Task Configurations

Using Default LocaL User Configurations

For loading the Default Local User Configuration, press the button on the Chart panel toolbar and
select the button

The Default Configuration will close all the additional windows and panels, and also will restore some parameters to
their default values recommended by the IEC 61174 standard.

A similar result can be obtained by pressing the button on the Chart panel toolbar and selecting the button

.
In the configuration loading window which will open up, make a double click on the default configuration in the Local
column.

Using Bridge User Configuration

Creating Bridge User Configuration
ATTENTION! The Bridge User Configuration can be created and loaded on a station with the ECDIS MASTER
status only.

The operator creates the Bridge User Configuration which consists of a number of Local User Configurations for the
NS, NR and NC tasks on each WS.
To this end, Local User Configurations for the NS and NR must be already created for each WS. One of the available
Screen Views (Docking, NavData, Navigation or Custom Screen Views) is used as a Local User Configuration for
the NC.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 71

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the button on the Chart panel and select the button .
In the configuration loading window which will open up, press the Edit Config button in the Bridge column.

In the Multipanel window the User Configurations panel will open up on the Bridge page.

The Bridge page displays as many tabs as there are currently turned-on WS’s in the navigation bridge network.
Each tab shows whose applications are installed in the WS in question.

NOTE: The configuration setup is made for each WS.

72 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Handling ECDIS Task Configurations

Select the Local User Configuration for each application from the drop-down lists.

Press the necessary radiobutton before the task name for selecting the application which will be active (on top) upon
the loading of the Bridge User Configuration.
Set the configuration for all the WS’s.
In the input box of the Bridge Configuration group, type the Bridge User Configuration name.

Press Save.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 73

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Loading Bridge User Configuration

ATTENTION! The Bridge User Configuration can be loaded from the task with the ECDIS MASTER status.

For loading Bridge User Configuration, press the button on the Chart panel toolbar and select the button

.
In the configuration loading window which will open up, make a double click on the necessary configuration in the
Bridge column.

The selected Bridge User Configuration will be applied on those WS/tasks which were specified.
If some safety parameters are changed for the Local User Configuration when Bridge User Configuration is loaded a
special window will be displayed on the ECDIS Master WS (see the previous item).

The New Parameters window displays the currently set parameters (Original Value) and parameters which will be
set as the result of loading the Local User Configuration (New Value).
By default, all the parameters are selected, this is why, after the OK button has been pressed, all the values loaded
from the Local User Configuration will be accepted. To keep the currently set parameter values, clear the
checkboxes next to their names.
Press OK.
For the list of parameters which the loaded values should be specified for, see below paragraph Functional
Description.

74 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 ECDIS Task Control • Handling ECDIS Task Configurations

Deleting Bridge User Configuration

For deleting the Bridge User Configuration press the button on the Chart panel toolbar and select the button

.
In the configuration loading window, which will open up, press the Edit Config button in the Bridge column.

In the Multipanel window, the User Configurations panel will open up on the Bridge page.

From the drop-down list in the Bridge Configuration group select the necessary Bridge User Configuration and
press the Delete button.

In the window which will appear, press Yes to confirm the deleting of the selected Bridge User Configuration.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 75

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Navigation Tasks
This chapter describes the procedure used during the operation in the navigation mode.

Setting Position Sources 78

Setting Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS) 78
Setting ER Mode 81
Setting EP Mode 86
Setting DR Mode 87
Display of Non-Primary Positioning System Symbol on ECDIS Task Screen 89
Use of Manually Fixed Position for Determining Ship Position 90
Setting Heading Source 97
Setting Speed Sources 98
Setting Speed-Through-Water Source 99
Setting Speed-Over-Ground Source 99
Setting Depth Source 100
Obtaining Current Navigational Data Information 101
Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode 103
Setting Lead Distance (F-DIST) 103
Loading Route 104
Selection of Safety Parameters when Loading Monitored Route 109
Loading Schedule 112
Obtaining Current Information on Monitored Route and Schedule 113
Unloading Route and Schedule 116
Handling Charts and Chart Information 117
Prompt Search and Load Charts 117
Loading and Scaling Charts under Own Ship Position 118
Switching Chart Information Layers 123
Handling ENC Format Charts 126
Handling AIO Chart 128
Using Auto Zoom Function 132
Using Mooring Mode 133
Search and Rescue Operations 135
Using Man Overboard (MOB) Mode 135
Creating SAR Routes 137

76 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks •

Using Special Purpose Objects 145

Creating SPO 146
Deleting SPO 147
Other Functions 148
Saving and Loading SPO Configuration 148

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 77

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting Position Sources

ATTENTION! Setting of position sources is available only on the station with the MASTER status.

Open the Sensors panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Sensors panel which will open up, to switch to the Ship Position page:

The Ship Position page is designed for selecting the position source. The Ship position page displays all the
connected coordinates sensors, as well as the Dead Reckoning (DR) and Echo Reference (ER) modes.

Setting Electronic Position Fixing System (EPFS)

78 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

The group of each EPFS source contains the following elements:

● PRIM – to select the source as the primary positioning system; the window is intended for displaying the current
coordinates received from the positioning system;
● SEC – to select the source as the secondary positioning system; the window is intended for displaying the current
coordinates received from the positioning system;
● Position window for the coordinates display;
● Offset – window for the input and display of the ship position coordinates offset;
● Cancel Offset – to cancel the entered corrections;
● Set Offset By – to enter the correction by specifying new coordinates
with the ECDIS task graphics cursor.
Press the PRIM and SEC buttons to select the primary and secondary positioning systems.
To monitor parameters of the EPFS used for the primary positioning system, press the button with the name of
the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Sensor Data/Status line and press the left trackball button.
Use the tab in the top part of the Sensor Data/Status display panel which will open up, to switch to the Primary
Status page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 79

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Primary Status page is used for presenting the following data from the EPFS used as the primary positioning
system:
● Fixed UTC – UTC time which the data is provided for;
● Latitude – latitude coordinate;
● Longitude – longitude coordinate;
● Quality – positioning quality indicator (GPS operating mode);
● Satellites – number of satellites used for the positioning;
● HDOP – HDOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision) value;
● Data age – age of differential corrections;
● Station ID – name of the station which transmits differential corrections for the DGPS used by the primary
positioning system (where the differential mode is used);
● RMS 95% – ship position 95% RMS error (for the 95% RMS error calculation algorithm, see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 2, section
Navigational Sensors, paragraph Positioning, under RMS Calculations for Different Positioning Systems).
In the absence of data from the PS positioning systems (or in the absence of a valid GGA sentence), there are empty
fields on the display.
To enter the EPFS offset, use the following procedure:
1. For manual input. Position the cursor in the Offset window on the minute value and press the left trackball button
to activate the window. Enter the coordinate offset and press <ENTER>.

The ship symbol will move to the corrected coordinates, the coordinate offset will be displayed in the
Offset window, whilst the position window will show corrected coordinates from the position source.

2. Input of the EPFS offset by the cursor. Press the Set Offset By button in the position source group and select
Cursor.

80 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

Move the graphics cursor which will appear, to the corrected ship position coordinates.

Press the left trackball button. The ship symbol will move to the specified coordinates.

The coordinate offset will be shown in the Offset window, whilst the position window will display
corrected coordinates from the position systems.

Setting ER Mode

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 81

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The ER group contains the following elements:

● PRIM – to select the ER mode as the primary positioning system;
● SEC – to select the ER mode as the secondary positioning system;
● Position window for the coordinates display;
● Offset – window for the input and display of the ship position coordinates offset;
● Cancel Offset – to cancel the entered corrections;
● Set Offset By – to enter the correction by specifying new coordinates
with the ECDIS task graphics cursor;
● Select targets – to select targets as fixed reference points (the button is enabled
if at least one steadily tracked target is available);
● Reset targets – to cancel reference points.
To set the ER mode, it is first necessary to set the reference points. Press the ARPA button in the top part of the
Control panel to turn on the display of targets.

NOTE: If at least one steadily tracked target is available, the Select targets button will be activated.

Press the Select targets button.

Position the free cursor on the tracked target which will serve as a reference point.

NOTE: Any ARPA tracked stationary target can serve as a reference point.

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball button.

The “R” index will show up next to the reference point. Set the necessary number of reference points (up to 5).

82 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

To use the position determined with the aid of reference points, in the ER group press the PRIM or SEC button.

To monitor parameters of the ER mode, press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel
window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Sensor data/status line and press the left trackball button.
Use the tab in the top part of the Sensor data/status display panel which will open up, to switch to the Primary
Status page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 83

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Primary Status page is used for presenting the list of ER targets:
● Tgt Id – reference point ID;
● Brg-Dist – bearing and distance to the reference point;
● RMS 95% – 95% RMS error for each reference point;
● Total RMS – the maximum 95% RMS error among all the reference points (for the 95% RMS error calculation
algorithm, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description,
Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Positioning, under RMS Calculations for Different
Positioning Systems).
To cancel the reference point, press the Reset targets button.
Position the free cursor on the reference point to be cancelled.

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball button.

The “R” index will stop show up next to the reference point.

The position offset by cursor for the ER is entered manually and with the cursor in much the same way as for the
EPFS (see the previous paragraph).To enter the ER offset, use the following procedure:
1. The position offset for the ER is entered in much the same way as for the EPFS (see the previous paragraph).

84 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

2. The position offset by target. Press the Set Offset By button in the position source group and select Target.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear on the required reference point.

Press the left trackball button. The marker will “acquire” the reference point and change own form. Set
the cursor in the new coordinates corresponding to the reference point on the chart.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 85

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the left trackball button. The ship symbol (as well as the radar scanning centre if displayed) will
move to the calculated coordinates.

Setting EP Mode
DRIFT FROM DRIFT
CALCULATED DRIFT
SENSOR

The EP group is intended for setting parameters used in the EP (corrected DR) mode and contains the following
elements:
● PRIM – to select the DR mode as the primary positioning system;
● SEC – to select the DR mode as the secondary positioning system;
● Position window for the display and input of coordinates;
● Set by cursor – to enter the position by specifying new coordinates with the ECDIS task graphics cursor;
● Last drift – to use the last calculated drift parameters;
● Drift sens – to use parameters from the drift sensor;
● Total current – to use parameters of drift caused by total tidal and surface current from the database;
● Manual input – to enter drift parameters manually (0–360 degrees/0.0–9.9 knots).
In the EP group, press the PRIM or SEC button. Enter the current ship position in the input window.
In this case the name of the position source displayed in the Primary (Secondary) window of the Control panel will
be shown in yellow (see also document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional
Description, Chapter 4, section Indications, paragraph Display of Important Indications).

To enter the EP with the cursor, press the Set by cursor button.

86 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

Move the graphics cursor which will appear, to the corrected ship position coordinates.

Press the left trackball button. The ship symbol will move to the specified coordinates.

The Position window will display new coordinates from the EP.

Setting DR Mode

The DR group contains the following elements:

● PRIM – to select the DR mode as the primary positioning system;
● SEC – to select the DR mode as the secondary positioning system;
● Position window for the display and input of coordinates;
● Set by cursor – to enter the position by specifying new coordinates with the ECDIS task graphics cursor.

In the DR group, press the PRIM or SEC button. Enter the current ship position in the input box.
In this case the name of the position source displayed in the Primary (Secondary) window of the Control panel will
be shown in yellow (see also document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional
Description, Chapter 4, section Indications, paragraph Display of Important Indications).

To enter the DR with the cursor, press the Set by cursor button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 87

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Move the graphics cursor which will appear, to the corrected ship position coordinates.

Press the left trackball button. The ship symbol will move to the specified coordinates.

The Position window will display new coordinates from the DR.
To monitor parameters of the DR mode, press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel
window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Sensor data/status line and press the left trackball button.

88 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

Use the tab in the top part of the Sensor data/status display panel which will open up, to switch to the Primary
Status page.

The Primary Status page is used for presenting the following parameters:
● Sailing under DR – time of sailing in the DR ship positioning mode;
● RMS error radius – ship position RMS error (for the RMS error calculation algorithm, see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 2, section
Navigational Sensors, paragraph Positioning, under RMS Calculations for Different Positioning Systems).

Display of Non-Primary Positioning System Symbol on

ECDIS Task Screen
There is a capability to display the own ship position from the Non-Primary positioning systems.
Use the tab in the top part of the Sensors panel which will open up, to switch to the Ship Position page.

To this end, select the Show Pos mark checkbox of the relevant positioning system.

The own ship symbols will be displayed on the ECDIS task screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 89

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use of Manually Fixed Position for Determining Ship

Position
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Manually Fix Position line and press the left trackball button.

The Manually Fix Position display is intended for constructing the ship line of position (LOP) by measuring bearing
and/or range to one or more visible objects whose coordinates are known in advance (or the object can be uniquely
identified on the chart).
The display contains the following items:
● Accept position – to record the calculated ship position on the chart and in the Ship Log Book (when the DR
positioning system is used, to enter calculated coordinates for further computation);
● Cancel all – to cancel all the measurements which have been made;

90 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

● 1…6 – to switch bearing and/or range measurements. That number of buttons is active which is equal to the
number of measurements which have been made, the rest are disabled. Depending on the measurement status,
the buttons have the following colours:
● black – bearing/range determined and referenced to the chart conspicuous point;
● red – measurement taken and referenced, but the system considers it incorrect on the basis of LOP being at a
distance of more than one mile from the reckoned position (with the LOP advice function ON only);
● blue – free cell for setting the measurement;
● white – the data is entered, but the position line is not referenced by the user.

● Bearing – to enter bearing;

● Distance – to enter range;
● Brg/Dist – to enter simultaneously the bearing and distance to one object;
● Automatic jump to new LOP – to turn on automatic transfer to the next measurement after the input of LOP
data without referencing to an object;
● LOP advise – to turn on the function providing a warning that the position line is more than 1 mile away from the
reckoned position. In this case, the button with the measurement number turns red;
● Snap – LOP automatic referencing to objects.
Press the Bearing button. After the selection of the measurement type, the Manually Fix Position display looks
like shown in the drawing below:

In this case, depending on the measurement type, the display contains the following items:
● Time – time of the current measurement data input;
● D – difference between the input of the first and current measurement data in minutes and seconds;
● Brg – to enter bearing to the object;
● Name – name or type of the object which is referenced to with the Snap to Object function turned on
(see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3,
section Manually Fixed Position, paragraph Line of Position Referencing);
● Apply – to confirm the entered current measurement data. With the Automatic jump to new LOP function ON,
there is an automatic transfer to the input of the next measurement;
● Cancel – to cancel the entered current measurement data.
Enter the bearing to the object in the Brg input box by using the trackball or keyboard. Press the left trackball button.

NOTE: Measurement time in the Time box is set at the current time minus 5 seconds.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 91

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the activated Apply button.

A red coloured line will be drawn on the Chart panel, with the measurement time specified.
Use the button in the top part of the Manually Fix Position display to switch to the next measurement (if the
Automatic jump to new LOP function is ON, the switching is made automatically).

Press the Distance button.

92 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

Enter the distance to the object in the Dist input box by using the trackball or keyboard. Press the left trackball
button.
Press the activated Apply button.

A red coloured position line will appear on the Chart panel.

To reference the position lines, press the button with the first measurement number in the Manually Fix Position
display. After the confirmation of the entered current measurement data, the Manually Fix Position display looks
like shown below:

In this case, the display contains the following items:

● Move and reference – to reference the position line to a chart object;
● Delete – to cancel the entered current measurement data.
Press the Move and reference button.
On the Chart panel, bring the beginning of the position line in coincidence with the object which the bearing was
measured to (if the Snap to object checkbox is selected, the LOP will be referenced to the object automatically if it
is not farther than 0.5 mile from its beginning).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 93

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the left trackball button.

To bind the next position line, press the button with the next measurement number in the Manually Fix Position
display.

Press the Move and reference button.

On the Chart panel, bring the centre of the position line circle into coincidence with the object which the distance was
measured to (if the Snap checkbox is selected, the LOP will be referenced to the object automatically if it is not
farther than 0.5 mile from its centre). Press the left trackball button.

94 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Position Sources

The position line will be bound to the object and will be displayed in the orange colour. After the binding of two

position lines, the orange coloured symbol will appear on the Chart panel in the point with coordinates of the
calculated ship position. Specified next to the symbol are the letters “EP” and the most recent calculation time.
Construct the necessary number of position lines.
If it is necessary to accept the results of a manually fixed position, use the Accept position button (see also
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3, section
Manually Fixed Position).
If an Optical Bearing Device (OBD) is connected to the MFD, a button for turning on the bearing line presentation
appears on the Manually Fix Position display.

The OBD continuously transmits bearing information to the MFD. This allows the ECDIS task screen to provide a
real-time display of an Optical Bearing Line – showing what the OBD operator is looking/pointing at.
Press the OBD: show Bearing Line button.

The Chart panel will show the Optical Bearing Line in the form of a yellow line.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 95

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

After the OBD operator has fixed a position, the Chart panel will display a LOP with the measurement time.

At the same time, the obtained bearing will be accepted as a measurement for the Manually Fix Position Method.

Data from the OBD will be displayed in the Brg input boxes and can be subsequently used for further calculations
(see above).

96 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Heading Source

Setting Heading Source

ATTENTION! Setting of heading sources is available only at the station with the MASTER status .

Open the Sensors panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Sensors panel to switch to the Heading page:

The Heading page is designed for selection of a heading source. The Heading page shows all the connected
heading sensors.
The group of each heading source contains the following elements:
● GYRO 1 – to select this sensor as the heading source; the window is intended for displaying a heading value from
the sensor;
● Gyro Offset – for the manual input of the gyro offset (for gyro compass);
● Magnetic variation – for the input of the magnetic variation from the database (the Auto button), or manually in
the input window (for the magnetic compass);
● MANUAL – to select the use of manual heading input; the window is intended for the heading input.

Press the button with the source name to select the main source of heading whose data will henceforth be used for
making all the calculations in the system.
If necessary, enter errors (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional
Description, Chapter 2, section Navigational Sensors, paragraph Compensations for Navigational Data) for gyro and
variation for magnetic compass.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 97

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting Speed Sources

ATTENTION! Setting of speed sources is available only at the station with the MASTER status .

Open the Sensors panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Sensors panel to switch to the Speed page.

The Speed page is designed for selecting a speed source.

98 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Setting Speed Sources

Setting Speed-Through-Water Source

The STW sources group is designed for selecting a source of speed through the water. The group shows all the
connected speed-through-water sensors.
The group of each speed-through-water source can contain the following elements:
● DLOG – to select the DLOG as a source of STW; the boxes are intended for displaying longitudinal and
transverse components of the speed-through-water vector, the arrows showing the direction of components;
● LOG – to select the LOG as a source of speed through water; the window is intended for displaying STW value
from the log;
● MANUAL – to select the use of manual STW input; the window is intended for the speed input.

Press the button with the source name to select the source of speed through the water, whose data will henceforth
be used for making all the calculations in the system.

Setting Speed-Over-Ground Source

The SOG sources group is designed for selecting a source of speed over ground. The group shows all the
connected speed-over-ground sensors.
The group of each speed-over-ground source can contain the following elements:
● Prim PS: GPS 1 – to select the EPFS as a source of SOG; the window is intended for displaying SOG value
from the EPFS;
● DLOG – to select the DLOG as a source of SOG; the boxes are intended for displaying longitudinal and
transverse components of the SOG vector, the arrows showing the direction of components;
● ER – to select the ER mode as a source of SOG; the window is intended for displaying the SOG value; the
buttons is intended for:
● Select targets – to select targets as fixed reference points (the button is enabled if at least one steadily tracked
target is available);
● Reset targets – to cancel reference points.

● STW + Drift – to select STW as SOG, manual drift input taken into account. The window is intended for
displaying SOG value. The input boxes are intended for:
● Set – to display and manually enter the set;
● Drift – to display and manually enter the drift.
Press the button with the source name to select the source of speed over ground whose data will henceforth be used
for making all the calculations in the system.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 99

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting Depth Source

ATTENTION! Setting of depth sources is available only at the station with the MASTER status .

Open the Sensors panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Sensors panel to switch to the Echosounder page.

The Echosounder page is designed for selecting a depth source. The Echosounder page shows all the connected
depth sensors.
The group of each depth source can contain the following elements:
● ECHOSOUNDER 1 – to select this sensor as a depth source; the window is intended for displaying the depth
value from the sensor.
Press the button with the source name to select the main source of depth whose data will henceforth be used for
making all the calculations in the system.

100 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Obtaining Current Navigational Data Information

Obtaining Current Navigational Data Information

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Navigator line and press the left trackball button.

The Navigator display is intended for enlarged presentation of the following selectable data:
● HDG (Heading);
● STW;
● COG;
● SOG;
● ROT;
● XTD;
● BWOL (Bearing to Wheel Over Line);
● BWW (Bearing Waypoint to Waypoint);
● DWOL (Distance to Wheel Over Line);
● ETA;
● TTG (Time To Go);
● Radius (turn radius at the next waypoint);
● Turn Radius;
● DPT.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 101

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Only six values can be displayed simultaneously on the display.

Press the button in the left-hand part of the display and from the pull-down list, select navigational data which is
required to be shown on the display.

Make up the Navigator display configuration which suits you best.

To display depth from the echosounder on the ECDIS task screen, press the button with the name of the set display
in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

102 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

In the list which will open up, select the System Information line and press the left trackball button.

The Depth row displays a value of water depth under the keel (from the sounder data).

Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

ATTENTION! Loading of a route and schedule in the navigation mode is available only at station with the MASTER
status.

Setting Lead Distance (F-DIST)

ATTENTION! For the F-DIST setting no route should be loaded in the monitoring mode.

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 103

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the General page.

NOTE: The lead distance (F-DIST) is set during the installation on the Ship Settings page of the INS panel (see
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide , Chapter 2, section
MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings ).

In the Ship Condition group, select the ship loading conditions.

NOTE: If the monitored route is selected, or the WS is not the Navigation MASTER, the group will be greyed.

In the input box to the right, set the F-DIST. The selected distance will be taken into account in the operation of
various functions throughout the MFD (e.g., route planning, Curved Heading Line, Track Control etc.).

Loading Route
Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

104 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

The Route group enables loading and unloading of monitored routes and schedules by using the following buttons:
● Load route – to select and load a route from the offered list;
● Set schedule – to select and load a schedule for the loaded route from the offered list;
● Unload – to unload the previously loaded route and/or schedule.

Press the Load route button in the Route row of buttons.

Select the required route and press the left trackball button.
According to the standard, the route which is being loaded for monitoring, is required to be checked for dangers to
navigation. By default, the user will be unable to load an unchecked route. This function can be disabled (e.g. for
ECS) in the INS panel’s General page in the System Configuration utility at the system setup stage (see document
Multifunctional. (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings,
item 2). An exception is made for the SAR routes which can be loaded without a check (see below section Search
and Rescue Operations, paragraph Creating SAR Routes).
If the route which is being loaded has not been checked for dangers to navigation, a relevant message will be
provided:

Press the OK button and check the route for dangers to navigation (see Chapter 9, section Work with Route,
paragraph Checking and Editing the Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 105

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

If the route has been checked for dangers to navigation, the Voyage Status window will appear.

In the Voyage Status window, the current voyage is selected by default (the Current Voyage checkbox is
selected). The voyage is understood as a route with a schedule including the departure and arrival time/date,
currently fulfilled between two consecutive ports without stops, berth to berth.
Select the New voyage checkbox if the route loaded for monitoring refers to a new voyage. In the input box to the
right of the checkbox enter the new voyage name. In this case, it is also advisable to update a record on a new
voyage in the ship log, since this is not done automatically (see Chapter 6, section Using Ship Log Book, paragraph
Separating Voyages).

From the Active schedule drop-down list, select the necessary schedule which will be loaded along with the route.
Press the Ok button.
The selected route will be loaded for sailing on the Chart panel, and its name will be displayed on the button.

106 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

The Waypoints group contains buttons and boxes for the input of values used for calculating mutual positions of the
route elements and the ship:
● Next Waypoint – to select the mode of setting the next WPT for calculating parameters of motion along the route:
● Auto selection – to switch WPT’s successively in the automatic mode; the WPT closest to the ship position is
selected automatically;
● Manual selection – to set the next WPT number manually; input of the next WPT number is made in the
appropriate box.
● Radius – to set parameters of the turn radius arc for the display of an approximate track on the turn to another
route leg:
● Same for All WPT's – to set manually for all the route points in the box to the right;
● From Route Table – to set automatically from the data entered in the route.

For the manual setting of the next WPT, press the Next Waypoint button.

In the list which will open up, select Manual selection and press the left trackball button. Use the activated input
line to enter the next WPT number.

Press the left trackball button.

ATTENTION! In the automatic mode, it is the next WPT of the route leg which the ship is proceeding by which is
set. If some other WPT is selected manually for the next one, all the calculations are made relative to the route leg
adjacent to the selected WPT.

For the manual setting of the turn arc parameters, press the Radius button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 107

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the list which will open up, select Same for all WPT’s and press the left trackball button. Use the activated left-
hand input line to enter a new turn arc radius.

Press the left trackball button. The set parameters will be fixed for all the points of the monitored route.

To turn on the display of monitored route elements on the ECDIS task screen press the following buttons:
● XTD – to display deviation from the route line (set during the route generation see Chapter 9, section Creating a
Route);
● Radius – to display set the turn radius arc on a turn to another route leg;
● WOL – to display Wheel Over Lines;
● Head mark – to display dashed lines stretching the monitored route current and next leg in the head directions to
the limits of the ECDIS task screen;
● Stern mark – to display dashed lines stretching the monitored route current and next leg in the stern direction to
the limits of the ECDIS task screen;
● Sun/Moon - to display sun and moon rises and sets symbols;
● WPT names – to display the names of waypoints set in the route plan;
● CRS/DIST– to display course and range for each route leg;
● Speed– to display speed for each route leg;
● Ref. points – to display Reference points. The Reference points are entered at the route planning and editing
stage on the Route Planning panel (see Chapter 9, section Voyage Plan Creation, paragraph Obtaining
Information on Sun/Moon on the Route);
● Remark – to display additional important remarks in plain text for every route leg. The route leg remarks are
entered at the route planning and editing stage on the Route Planning panel (see Chapter 9,section Work with
Route , paragraph Creating a Route, item Entering Additional Data).

108 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

Selection of Safety Parameters when Loading Monitored

Route
Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Safety Alerts page.

In the Source of safety parameters group, select the source which the safety parameters will be taken from for the
route monitoring.
If the route is not loaded for monitoring, the Fixed radio button will be selected automatically, safety parameters set
in the Safety parameters group are used for monitoring dangers.
As a route to be monitored is loaded, the last operator-selected From route or Fixed value is set automatically.
If the Fixed value is selected, the safety parameters set in the Safety parameters group are used (see also
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section
Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts.).
If the From the route value is selected, safety parameters are selected by using the procedure detailed below.
Depending on the sailing area (narrows or open sea), when creating the route, the user can specify appropriate
safety parameters (safety contour, safety depth) for each leg. As the ship is proceeding along the route, should the
current values of safety parameters differ from the values set on the route, the ECDIS will automatically offer to
apply new safety parameters (with the Advanced Planning option ON).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 109

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

When a monitored route is loaded, there may be two scenarios depending on the ship position relative to the route at
the moment of loading:
1. The ship is approaching the start of the route, i.e., it is WPT “0” which will be monitored after loading.

If the safety contour (SC) and safety depth (SD) values in the loaded route match the current values (set on the
Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel), no warnings will be displayed. If the values of safety parameters
differ from the current values, the top part of the Chart panel will display a warning in which the user will be
requested to apply the values specified in the route for the WPT0-WPT1 leg by pressing the Accept button, or
leave the current safety parameters by pressing the Cancel button. New safety parameters will be applied (i.e.,
they will become the current values and will be displayed on the Safety Alerts page of the Monitoring panel)
after WPT 0 has been passed. If the operator ignores the warning, larger SC and SD values will be set with a
change of the waypoint.
2. The ship is on some leg of the route which is being loaded, on the WPT0-WPT1 leg in the example below.

110 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

If the safety contour (SC) and safety depth (SD) values for the current leg of the route which is being loaded
match the current values, no warnings are displayed. Otherwise the Chart panel will display the Safety
Parameters pop-up window. This window specifies the current SC and SD values as well as the values set for
the current route leg (WPT0-WPT1). The user should select values which should be loaded for monitoring: from
the route (Accept) or leave the current values (Cancel). If new safety parameters are applied for the current route
leg, they will immediately become the current values and will be displayed on the Safety Alerts page of the
Monitoring panel).

After this, if the SC and SD values for the current leg (WPT0-WPT1) do not match the values set for the next
route leg (WPT1-WPT2), the top part of the Chart panel will display a relevant warning (for further information see
item 1).
As the ship is proceeding along the monitored route, if the SC and SD values of the next leg are different from the
current value, 2 minutes after the waypoint (WPT1) is changed, an appropriate warning will appear in the top part of
the Chart panel (for leg WPT2-WPT3).

The user is then required to use the procedure described in item 1.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 111

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Loading Schedule
Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

Load the route as described in paragraph Loading Route above.

If it is necessary to load or select another schedule, press the Set schedule button in the Route row of buttons.

The list of schedules created for this route will open up. Select the necessary schedule. Press the left trackball
button. The selected schedule will be loaded.

112 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

Obtaining Current Information on Monitored Route

and Schedule
Route Data
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Route Data line and press the left trackball button.
Use the tab in the top part of the Route Datadisplay which will open up, to switch to the Route Data page.

The Route Data page is intended for the display of data as the ship is proceeding along the route to the next
waypoint (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description,
Chapter 5, section Route Monitoring, paragraph Sailing Along the Route).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 113

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The page contains the following data:

● Route – name of the monitored route; as the End of route warning is generated, the word “Route” is shown in the
orange colour;
● To WPT – number and name of the current WPT which the ship is proceeding to; the WPT name is shown in
black if the WPT is selected automatically, and in the blue colour if selected manually;
● BWW – direction of the monitored route leg which the ship is proceeding by if the leg is of the RL type; or the
current course in the case of the GC leg;
● XTD – actual distance from the current route leg; as the Off track alarm is generated, the letters “XTD” are shown
in orange;
● BWOL – bearing to the current WOL;
● DWOL – distance to the current WOL;
● ETA – the estimated time (UTC/Ship depending on the setting made in the Control panel) of arrival in the current
WPT, the remaining distance and current speed (SOG) taken into account;
● TTG – time to go to the current waypoint calculated with regard to the actual speed (SOG);
● Next WPT – number of the next WPT;
● BWW – direction of the next route leg;
● RAD –arc radius on the turn to the next route leg.

Schedule Information
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Route Data line and press the left trackball button.

114 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Loading of Route and Schedule in Navigation Mode

Use the tab in the top part of the Route Data panel which will open up, to switch to the Schedule page.

The Schedule page serves for presenting information related to sailing according to the selected schedule (see
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).Functional Description, Chapter 5, section
Route Monitoring, paragraph Sailing Along the Route). For the display of data, it is necessary to load a route on the
Route Monitoring page of the Monitoring panel (see above Loading Route). The schedule elements whose values
differ from those set on the Route Monitoring page of the Monitoringpanel (Out of Schedule alert) are shown in
orange.
The display contains the following data:
● To WPT – to select a WPT number for the display of associated schedule elements; the line to the right shows
the name of the WPT if any was given by the operator;
● Schedule – to turn on the display of ETA and TTG calculated with regard to the prepared schedule;
● Current SOG – to turn on the display of ETA and TTG calculated with regard to the current speed (SOG);
● ETA (UTC) – estimated time of arrival in the selected WPT calculated from the remaining distance and set speed
(UTC/Ship depending on the setting made in the Control panel);
● TTG – time to go to the specified WPT calculated with regard to the actual ETA;
● DWOL – distance to the wheel over line;
● PTA – planned time of arrival in the specified WPT taken from the schedule.
In the bottom part of the display there is a calculator for calculating speed to go (STG) to the specified waypoint or
planned time of arrival (PTA) in the specified waypoint:
● STG – operator-entered planned speed of proceeding to the specified point for the PTA calculations in the window
on the right;
● PTA – operator-entered planned time of arrival (PTA) to the specified point for the STG calculations in the window
on the left.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 115

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Unloading Route and Schedule

Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

In the Route group, press the Unload button. The route and/or schedule loaded for sailing will be unloaded.

116 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

Handling Charts and Chart Information

Prompt Search and Load Charts
Open the Charts panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the left part of the Charts panel which will open up, to switch to the Complete list or By position
page depending on which chart is required to be found. All the functions of these pages are identical, the only
difference between them being in the set of charts available for work.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 117

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The aforementioned pages contain the following:

● Chart number input box and the Find button to activate the chart search function by the number entered in the
box.
● If the chart with the required number has not been found, the prompt bar in the bottom part of the area displays the
following message:
● No charts found – no charts with this number have been found;
● Partial match found – a group of charts has been found, whose numbers start with the entered characters.
● Manual chart selection window. Charts in the list can be sorted by the following parameters:
● Chart Number – chart number;
● Scale – chart scale;
● Last upd. – date of the most recent chart updating in dd-mm-yyyy format;
● Updated to – the media which was used for the latest updating of TX-97 or SENC chart collection;
● Format – chart format.
Type the number or the first characters of a chart from the ship folio in the input field, and press Find.

The necessary chart will be highlighted in the table. Press the Load Chart button, the selected chart will be loaded in
the Chart panel.

Loading and Scaling Charts under Own Ship Position

Open the Charts panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

118 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the Charts panel which will open up, to switch to the General page.

This page is intended for the control of chart automatic loading and scaling which are determined by the following
parameters:
● Chart autoload – chart loading modes switching buttons:
● ON – to turn on the chart autoload mode whereby the largest scale chart will be automatically loaded;
● OFF – to turn off the autoload mode; as this is done, the current chart under the ship position or the chart loaded
manually is fixed until the loading mode switch;
● FIX – to turn on the chart fixing mode; as the ship symbol crosses the boundary of such chart, the chart loading
mode is automatically switched to the ON position.
● Chart autoscale – chart scaling modes switching buttons:
● ON – to load the chart on its original scale;
● OFF – to load the chart on the screen current scale.
● Scale ratio – to set the loaded chart scale differing from its original scale by the number of fixed scale values
(±5);
● Show only libraries for DNC charts – to enable display of the DNC library name instead of DNC tiles names (if
DNC charts used);
● Chart priority – to set the chart loading priority under the ship position:

● None – to load charts most suitable for the set scale. In this case, if there are several charts on the same scale,
priority is given to the TX-97 (TRX) format charts;
● ENC – to load ENC format vector charts ;
● DNC – to load DNC format vector charts (not available for this version);
● HCRF – to load ARCS and Seafarer format raster charts (not available for this version);

● Navi-Planner – to open the Navi-Planner 4000 application;

● HCRF Review – to open the window for viewing ARCS and Seafarer format charts (not available for this vesion).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 119

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Chart Loading
To turn on chart autoloading:
1. Press the ON button in the Chart autoload row of buttons (if not depressed).

2. Press the Autoload button in the Charts Area window of the Control panel.

This window is designed for the adjustment of the chart display on the Chart panel:
● Chart number – to call a menu with a list of charts under the ship position (if the ship symbol is displayed
on the chart) or the list of all the charts available in the ship folio. The button shows the current chart number;
● Autoload – to turn on the function for the automatic loading of charts. There is an indicator to the right of the
button:
● ON – the function is turned on (the Autoload button is greyed);
● OFF – the function is turned off;
● FIX – to fix the current chart.
The chart autoloading mode is set. For manual loading of the required chart, press the OFF button in the Chart
autoload row of buttons (if not depressed).

The chart autoloading mode is OFF, and the screen displays the current chart only.

120 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

In the Charts Area window of the Control panel, press the button with the current chart number.

Select the necessary chart from the list. The ECDIS task screen will display the required chart.

Selecting Loading Priority of Various Format Charts

If it is necessary to set the ENC format charts loading priority, select the ENC checkbox.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 121

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Chart Scaling
For automatic scaling, press the ON button in the Chart autoload row of buttons (if not depressed).

Press ON in the Chart autoscale row of buttons (if not depressed).

If it is necessary to turn on manual change of scale in the transfer to the next chart, use the Scale ratio window to
set the number of fixed values (from 1 to 5), which the scale should be increased/decreased by.

For manual scaling, press OFF in the Chart autoscale row of buttons.

Press a scale button in the Chart Area window on the Control panel (the button shows the current screen scale).
This feature is implemented in NS 4100 software only.

Select the required scale from the list which will open up, and press the left trackball button. The ECDIS task graphic
screen will display all the charts on the set scale.

122 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

There are two ways to decrease the chart display scale by the fixed scale value:

● Press the button on the Chart panel toolbar;

● Press the <ZOOM OUT> key on the ES6 keyboard.

There are two ways to increase the chart display scale by the fixed scale value:

● Press the button on the Chart panel toolbar;

● Press the <ZOOM IN> key on the ES6 keyboard.

To display the chart on the original scale, press the button on the Chart panel toolbar.

Switching Chart Information Layers

Open the Charts panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the Charts panel which will open up, to switch to the Layers page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 123

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

This page is intended for controlling display of individual chart information classes by using the following controls:
● Display category – to switch presentations of different display types:
● Base – to turn on presentation of objects included in the Base Display;
● Standard – to turn on presentation of objects included in the Standard Display;
● Custom – to turn on presentation of objects included in the Additional Information Display at the user
discretion;
● All – to turn on presentation of all the objects included in the Additional Information Display.

According to the IEC 61174 standard, the following information has to be displayed during the route planning and
monitoring:
● Display Base permanently shown on the ECDIS display, consisting of:
● Coastline (high water);
● Own ship's safety contour;
● Isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within safe waters defined by the
safety contour;
● Isolated dangers above water which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as fixed
structures, overhead wires, etc;
● Scale, range and north arrow;
● Units of depth and height; and
● Display mode.
● Standard Display, consisting of:
● Display base;
● Drying line;
● Buoys, beacons, other aids to navigation and fixed structures;
● Boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.;
● Visual and radar conspicuous features;
● Prohibited and restricted areas;
● Chart scale boundaries;
● Indication of cautionary notes;
● Ship’s routing systems and ferry routes;
● Archipelagic sea lanes.
● All other information to be displayed individually on demand, for example:
● Spot soundings;
● Submarine cables and pipelines;
● Details of all isolated dangers;
● Details of aids to navigation;
● Contents of cautionary notes;
● ENC edition date;
● Most recent chart update number;
● Magnetic variation;
● Graticule;
● Place names.
Press the Display category button and select the Standard menu item from the drop-down list:

124 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

All the checkboxes for turning on the display of objects included in the display will be selected by default:
● Buoys, beacons, aids to navigation – to turn on the display of buoys, beacons, aids to navigation;
● Boundaries and limits – to turn on the display of boundaries and limits;
● Prohibited and restricted areas – to turn on the display of prohibited and restricted areas;
● Ships' routeing systems and ferry routes – to turn on the display of ships' routeing systems and ferry routes;
● Archipelagic sea lanes – to turn on the display of archipelagic sea lanes;
● Cautionary notes – to turn on the display of cautionary notes;
● Drying line – to turn on the display of drying lines;
● Miscellaneous - to turn on display of all the objects not covered by the Standard display;
● Chart scale boundaries – to turn on the display of chart scale boundaries;.
Clear the appropriate checkboxes to turn off the display of unnecessary chart objects.

NOTE: If the Standard Display is selected, but some viewing group included in the Standard Display is turned off,
the STD DISP is customized important indication is displayed in the Operational window of the Control panel (see
also document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4,
section Indications, paragraph Display of Important Indications).

There is another way to set the necessary layer.

The Standard Display can also be set by pressing the button on the Control panel.

Settings on the Layers page and on the Control panel are equalised.
When the Standard Display is set, the display of the radar overlay, ARPA and AIS targets on the ECDIS task screen
is automatically turned off.

To set displays from the keyboard:

● Press the <ALL LAYERS> key on the ES6 keyboard to turn on presentation of all the objects included
in the Additional Information Display;
● Press the <STANDARD DISPLAY> key on the ES6 keyboard to set the Standard Display.

To turn on the display of the chart over the radar picture, press the button in the Display Panel toolbar. In this
case:
● Base Display mode is turned on;
● radar overlay is turned off;
● no targets (AIS, RIB, ARPA) are displayed;
● no tides or currents are displayed;
● no map objects are displayed;
● no Navtex objects are displayed.
With the use of the ES6 keyboard, press the <SHOW CHART> key to activate the function.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 125

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Display category button and select the Custom menu item from the drop-down list:

Select the checkboxes for turning on the display of necessary additional chart objects:
● All the objects included in the Standard display;
● All Isolated dangers – to turn on the display of isolated dangers with depths over them larger than the safety depth;
● Submarine cables, pipelines – to turn on the display of submerged cables and pipelines;
● All depth contours – to turn on the display of all the depth contours;
● Tidal - to turn on the display of tidal information;
● Depth contours – to turn on the display of depth contours with depths over them larger than the safety depth;
● Seabed – to turn on the display of ground characteristics;
● Important text – to turn on the display of important text;
● Other text – to turn on the display of other text (Names, Light description, etc.);
● Unknown - to turn on the display of objects which are not specified in S-52 standard;
● Miscellaneous STD- to turn on the display of all the objects not covered by the Standard display;
● Miscellaneous - to turn on the display of all the objects not covered by the Custom display;
● Magnetic variation – to turn on the magnetic variation;
● Spot soundings to – to turn on the display of depth values smaller than the setting made in the relevant window
(if the setting is “0”, all the soundings are displayed).
If the All menu item is selected from the Display category drop-down list, all the checkboxes for turning on the
display of the all available objects will be selected by default.

Handling ENC Format Charts

Open the Charts panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

126 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

Use the tab in the right-hand part of the Charts panel which will open up, to switch to the ENC page.

This page is intended for the adjustment and handling of the ENC format chart display.
From the Areas drop-down list, select the style of area type object boundary display (Plain and Symbolised).
From the Points drop-down list, select the style of the point type object display (Paper chart and Simplified).
Select the following checkboxes for turning on the display of necessary additional information classes:
● Danger in shallow water - to turn on the display of isolated danger objects which are located in the unsafe
waters;
● Contour labels - to turn on the display of contour labels;
● Four shades – to turn on colour highlighting of the set depth areas;
● Shallow pattern – to turn on the display of hatching in the presentation of areas with depths smaller than the
safety contour on the ENC format charts;
● Scale min (SCAMIN) – to turn on the display of an object on scales inadmissible for it (generalization method
selection);
● Full light lines – to switch the lengths of lines delimiting the light visibility sectors;
● Highlight Info – to turn on the display of highlighting for objects with the “Inform” attribute;
● Highlight Doc – to turn on the display of highlighting for objects with the “Text and/or Picture” attribute;
● Update review – to turn on colour highlighting for the objects which have undergone some modification in the
process of the latest accepted correction;
● Accuracy (CATZOC) – to turn on the display of accuracy symbols for the ship positioning and sounding during
the seabed contour survey on ENC format charts;
● National language – to turn on the display of national language text;
● Date dep. objects - to turn on the display of chart objects with temporal attributes;
● Highlight Dat dep. – to turn on the display of a symbol that indicates where in the chart display the objects with
temporal attributes are located.
If it is necessary, press the Show All button to turn on the display of all the parameters, or the Hide All button to
turn them off.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 127

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The following windows are used for information only (these parameters are set on the Safety Alerts page of the
Monitoring panel):
● Shallow contour - in the ENC, the four shades mode defines the value of the shallow contour affecting colours of
depth areas (dark blue for depth areas with values shallower than the shallow contour);
● Safety contour - mariner-selected contour to distinguish on the display between safe and unsafe water;
● Safety depth - mariner-defined depth to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this value;
● Deep contour - in the ENC, the four shades mode defines the value of deep contour affecting colours of depth
areas (the lightest S-52 colour for depth areas deeper than the deep contour).

Handling AIO Chart

ATTENTION!For the AIO chart to be displayed, the ENC charts which they are attached to should be installed.

NOTE: AIO chart is installed by using the Navi-Planner 4000 application.

Open the Overlays panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Overlays panel which will open up, to switch to the AIO Charts page.

This page is intended for handling AIO chart available in the ship collection and NTM (Notices To Mariners) included
in the AIO chart.

128 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

The page contains the following data:

● Find – to activate the chart search function by the NTM number entered in the window;
● Load – to load the chart which the selected NTM in question refers to;
● Table of NTM;
● Show AIO – to display the AIO chart on the Chart panel;
● Print - to print selected table rows;
● AIO Layer Control - to show separately different object classes and polygon attributes.
Press the Show AIO button. The Chart panel will display the AIO layer.

Use the Info function (see Chapter 11, section Obtaining Information on Vector Charts). On the Info panel, select the
General Chart Information notation in the GB80001: S57Ed3_AIO Chart section by positioning the cursor on it,
and press the left trackball button. The page with information on the AIO chart will open up.

To switch off AIO layer release the Show AIO button.

Use the tab in the left part of the AIO Charts page which will open up, to switch to the Complete list or the By
monitoring route page depending on which NTM is required to be found. All the functions of these pages are
identical, the only difference between them being in the set of NTM available for work.
The table which will open up shows the NTM (Notices To Mariners) included in the AIO chart.
The MFD capabilities can be used for reading and printing out the current NTM.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 129

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Type the number or the first characters of NTM in the input box, and press the Find button.

The necessary NTM will be highlighted in the table. The ENC charts affected column lists the chart which the NTM
in question refers to.
Double click on this NTM: the Chart panel will display the area which this NTM is applicable to.
Press Yes in the Reference column.

Select the *.txt file and press the left trackball button.

Read the NTM. If it is necessary to print out the NTM, press the Print button. To close the Text viewer window,
press Close.

130 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Handling Charts and Chart Information

The MFD implements a capability to show separately different object classes and polygon attributes. To do this,
press the AIO Layer Control button.

By default, the display of all the object classes and polygon attributes is turned on. The table below shows ways of
displaying object classes on the Chart panel.

HATCHING COLOUR ON THE

OBJECT CLASS DEFINITION
CHART PANEL

Indicates an area on an ENC where the UKHO has

Temporary Notice Red
published a Temporary Notice to Mariners
Indicates an area on an ENC where the UKHO has
Preliminary Notice published a Preliminary Notice to Mariners, this Green
includes (EP) NMs
Indicates additional preliminary information that is
ENC Preliminary Notice specific to ENCs, such as reported navigational Blue
hazards that are not yet charted
Indicates an area on an ENC where there is no
No Information Grey
equivalent BA chart coverage of the area

There is also a capability to display AIO geometric polygons with or without a fill and with text/boundaries turned on or
off. The table below provides examples of polygon attributes display with the selected/cleared checkboxes.

POLYGON
DISPLAY ON DISPLAY OFF
ATTRIBUTE

Text

Pattern fill

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 131

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

POLYGON
DISPLAY ON DISPLAY OFF
ATTRIBUTE

AIO Bounding Box

If the display of all attributes is turned on, the polygon looks as follows:

Using Auto Zoom Function

The Auto Zoom mode enables the automatic increase of scale as the next waypoint is approached (see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 3, section Split
Screen). This mode is available on the Dual panel only.
Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

132 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Using Mooring Mode

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the General page.

In the AutoZoom Settings group, from the drop-down list select the maximum scale as the ship is passing the
current WPT on the Dual panel. In the Time of update input box, set the DTW analysis interval.

To turn on Auto Zoom mode, press the button on the Dual chart panel toolbar.

NOTE: The ship should be proceeding in the route monitoring mode.

In this case, as DTW is decreasing, the ECDIS task increases the scale by one fixed scale value so that the ship
position remains within the Dual panel. With the ship approaching the boundary of the Dual panel in the process of
manoeuvres, the scale may be reduced by one fixed scale value. With a change of the WPT, the scale is set so that the
Dual panel displays the ship symbol, the current leg of the monitored route and the current WPT.

Using Mooring Mode

ATTENTION! Turning on/off Mooring Mode is available only on the station with the MASTER status.

This mode is intended for mooring operations and sailing in the restricted waters with intensive maneuvering.
Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 133

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the General page.

In the Mute alert sound group press the Mooring Mode button.

NOTE: The mooring mode cannot be enabled as long as the ownship speed exceeds 5 knots (the Mooring Mode
button is greyed).

In this case, the Mooring Mode warning appears in the top part of the Chart Panel, and the sound associated with
some alerts is turned off.
As the Mooring mode is turned on, a full event named “Mooring Mode ON” is entered in the log.
To turn off the Mooring Mode, press the Mooring Mode button again. In this case, a full event names “Mooring Mode
OFF” is entered in the log.
Alerts disabled in Mooring mode:

ALERT NAME ALERT NAME

DLOG: STW no data POSN. integrity failed

DLOG: no input SOG integrity failed
LOG no input STW Integrity failed
LOG no data

134 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Search and Rescue Operations

Search and Rescue Operations

Using Man Overboard (MOB) Mode
The MOB mode enables the display of information on a geographic point saved at a certain time. There are three
ways to turn on the MOB mode:

1. Press the button on the Chart panel toolbar.

2. Press the <MOB> key on the ES6 keyboard.
3. Press the external MOB button (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Installation Guide, Annex B, section Adjustment of MFD Operation with WAGO Modules, paragraph Connection
of External MOB Button).
As this is done, the system makes a log book entry which contains the name of the event: “MOB ENABLED” and a
full set of recorded parameters. The Control panel displays a panel shown below:

The following parameters can be displayed:

● coordinates of the MOB mode activation;
● time elapsed since the MOB mode was activated;
● bearing from the ship current position to the activation point;
● distance from the ship current position to the activation point.

If you know the MOB event time, press the Set time… button.

In the input box, enter the MOB event time: the MOB point is set in the own ship track point closest to the entered
time.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 135

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

If you know the MOB event coordinates, press the Set pos… button.

In the input box, enter the MOB coordinates: the MOB display is re-drawn to suit the entered data (e.g., upon receipt
of coordinates from another ship).
You can also use the cursor for setting the MOB coordinates. To do this, press the By Cursor button.
Move the graphics cursor which will appear, to the MOB coordinates.

Press the left trackball button, the cursor will assume the form of a free cursor.
Press the OK button in the Enter MOB position window.

The MOB symbol will move to the specified coordinates.

136 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Search and Rescue Operations

The Show seek circle button is enabled by default. Use the input box to the right of the button to enter the seek
circle expansion rate different from 0.

The Chart panel will display a red-coloured MOB- point-centred seek circle which will be expanding at the set rate.
Turn off the seek circle display as required by releasing the button.

To turn the MOB mode off, press the button again on the Chart panel toolbar or the <MOB> key on the ES6
keyboard.

Press Yes. An electronic log entry containing the “MOB DISABLED” event name, is made.
For the operation of MOB over the AIS, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v.
3.02.350). Additional Functions, Chapter 1, section MOB Mode with Use of RDF Rhotheta RT-202/RT-500M.

Creating SAR Routes

Open the Tasks panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 137

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Tasks panel to switch to the SAR page.

There are two ways to set the SAR route start point coordinates in the Commence search point group:
1. Enter the SAR route start point coordinates in the input box.
2. Press the By cursor button. Move the graphic cursor which will appear, to the SAR route start point coordinates.

Press the left trackball button.

In the Drift and Set input boxes, set the expected drift and set at the SAR operation site.
In the Own Ship Coordinates group, set the coordinates of the point of turn to the SAR route start point. If the
current ship coordinates are obtained from the positioning system and are then updated until the route save moment,
select the Current checkbox.
In the Speed input box set the expected speed of proceeding along the SAR route.

138 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Search and Rescue Operations

Expanding Square Route

Press the Search pattern type button in the SAR route generation group. In the list, which will open up, select the
Expanding square line and press the left trackball button (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

● Search pattern heading – search direction;
● Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;
● Number of legs – number of successive route legs;
● Starting leg length – start leg length.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button to save the route.
To quick load this SAR route in the monitoring mode, press the Monitor button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 139

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Parallel Tracks Route

Press the Search pattern type button in the SAR route generation group. In the list which will open up, select the
Parallel tracks line and press the left trackball button (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

● Search pattern heading – search direction;
● Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;
● Number of legs – number of successive route legs;
● Leg length – length of each leg;
● Track spacing – width of zone between the parallel tracks.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button to save the route.
To quick load this SAR route in the monitoring mode, press the Monitor button.

140 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Search and Rescue Operations

Sector Search Route

Press the Search pattern type button in the SAR route generation group. In the list which will open up, select the
Sector search line and press the left trackball button (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

● Search pattern heading – search direction;
● Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;
● Number of sectors – number of sectors;
● Search radius – search area radius (sectors);
● Turn angle – sector turn angle.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button to save the route.
To quick load this SAR route in the monitoring mode, press the Monitor button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 141

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Track Line Search Route

Press the Search pattern type button in the SAR route generation group. In the list which will open up, select the
Track line search line and press the left trackball button (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

● Search pattern heading – search direction;
● Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;
● Leg length – length of each leg;
● Track spacing – width of zone between the parallel tracks;
● Return to initial position – to plot the SAR route with a return to the initial position.

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button to save the route.
To quick load this SAR route in the monitoring mode, press the Monitor button.

142 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Search and Rescue Operations

Creeping Line Search Route

Press the Search pattern type button in the SAR route generation group. In the list which will open up, select the
Creeping line search line and press the left trackball button (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor
4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 5, section SAR Routes).

Set the following SAR route parameters:

● Search pattern heading – search direction;
● Turn radius – turn radius between the route legs;
● Leg length – length of each leg;
● Track spacing – width of zone between the parallel tracks.

Select a rescue facility whose speed is known and enter it in the input box to the right:
1. If the Aircraft speed is selected, the recommended ship speed calculated from a certain formula, will be
displayed automatically in the Ship speed box:

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button to save the route.
For quick loading of this SAR route in the monitoring mode, press the the Monitor button. In this case, the
recommended route for a ship engaged in search will look like follows:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 143

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

2. If the Ship speed is selected, the recommended aircraft speed calculated from a certain formula, will be
displayed automatically in the Aircraft speed box:

Enter the SAR route name in the Route name line and press the Save button to save the route.
For quick loading of this SAR route in the monitoring mode, press the Monitor button. In this case, the
recommended route for the aircraft engaged in search will look like follows:

144 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Using Special Purpose Objects

Using Special Purpose Objects

ATTENTION! Work with Special Purpose Objects is only available at a station with the MASTER status.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Special Purpose Objects line and press the left trackball button.

This MFD functionality enables special purpose objects (SPO), mobile and fixed, with certain features to be created
and referenced to an electronic chart with the purpose of their further monitoring and obtaining of auxiliary
information.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 145

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Creating SPO
Select the type of SPO to be created. Press the Object type button and select the appropriate item from the drop-
down list:

The following types of SPO are available for selection:

● Static – a fixed surface object: Target with constant coordinates;
● Seek circle – a search circle: Target with constant coordinates around which a circle is formed at the specified
moment of time, increasing in accordance with settings made by the user;
● Relative – a “satellite”: Target with motion parameters identical to the own ship’s course and speed;
● Moveable – a mobile object: Target with arbitrary motion parameters;
● UW Static – a fixed submerged object: Target with constant coordinates and depth;
● UPS – a UPS: Target with constant coordinates, reference point.
Press the Add Item button. Position the acquisition marker (graphics cursor) on the point where the SPO is required
to be plotted.

146 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Using Special Purpose Objects

Press the left trackball button: an SPO will be set in the specified coordinates.

Repeat the procedure until you set the required number of SPO's. After the input of the last SPO, press the right
trackball button to exit from the SPO setting mode.

Deleting SPO
Press the Delete button. Position the marker on the SPO required to be deleted.

Press the left trackball button.

If it is necessary to delete all the previously plotted objects simultaneously, including when the SPO is not displayed
on the screen, use the Delete all button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 147

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Other Functions
To plot a line connecting the own ship symbol and selected SPO, press the Set line button. Position the marker on
the required SPO.

Press the left trackball button.

To hide all the SPO's, press the Hide All Objects button. Repeated pressing on this button results in reappearance
of all the hidden SPO's.

Saving and Loading SPO Configuration

NOTE: SPO's of the following types only can be saved: Static, UW Static and UPS.

To save an SPO configuration, enter the configuration name in the input line of the Configuration group and press the
Save button which will be enabled. SPO configuration files are accessible with the use of the Data Tool utility, in the
SPO objects group of the SPO objects feature, and can be imported/exported from/to another PC.

148 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Navigation Tasks • Using Special Purpose Objects

To load an SPO configuration, press the Load objects button in the Configuration group.

From the drop-down list, select the necessary configuration.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 149

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting of Safety Parameters

This chapter describes the procedure used in the setting of safety parameters.

Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the Schedule 151

Monitoring of Safety Alerts 153
Setting of Safety Parameters for Detection of Dangerous Objects 154
Setting of Safety Parameters in Sailing in the Vicinity of Dangerous Objects 156
Monitoring of Crossing of Area Limits in IMO and Additional Groups 156
Setting Priority for Navigational and Area Alerts 157
Safety Tools 158
Clearing Bearing 158
Saving and Loading Configuration 165
Monitoring of Navigational Alerts 166
Monitoring of Time 169
Setting of End-of-Watch Alerts 169
Timer Setting 170

150 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the Schedule

Monitoring of Sailing along the Route and by the

Schedule
ATTENTION! Setting of safety parameters in the sailing along the route and by the schedule is available only at the
station with the MASTER status.

Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

The Alerts group is intended for turning on/off and setting of safety parameters for the alert generation during the
sailing along the route and according to the schedule:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 151

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

● End of route – to enable alert generation as the last WPT of the monitored route is passed;
● Out of XTD – to enable alarm generation when the ship deviation from the route line is larger than the value set
during the route planning;
● Out of schedule – to enable and set alerts generated when the ship is behind or ahead of the schedule;
● WPT approach – to enable alert generation a set period of time before the approach to the WPT;
● Off leg course – to enable and set parameters of the alert generated if the deviation between the current heading
(HDG) and the route leg line direction exceeds the set value.
Select the End of route checkbox in the Alerts group to turn on the alert generation as the last point of the route is
passed.

The parameter of tracking the ship position relative to the current route leg is set by default. The XTD value is set at
the time when the route is created on the Route Planning panel. The alarm is generated when the ship sails beyond
the XTD limits.

Use the WPT approach line to enter the alert generation time value as the next WPT is approached. Select the
activated WPT Approach checkbox to turn on the alert generated if the value of time of approach to the next WPT is
less than the set one.

Use the Off leg course line to enter the value of difference between the ship course and route leg direction. Select
the activated Off leg course checkbox to turn on the alert generation as the difference between the courses
exceeds the set value.

Use the Out of schedule line to enter the behind-the-schedule or ahead-of-the-schedule time relative to the loaded
schedule. The alert is generated when the set value is exceeded. Select the activated Out of schedule checkbox.

152 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Monitoring of Safety Alerts

Monitoring of Safety Alerts

ATTENTION! Setting of safety parameters for the detection objects representing danger to navigation is available
only at the station with the MASTER ststus.

Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Safety Alerts page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 153

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting of Safety Parameters for Detection

of Dangerous Objects
The Safety frame group is intended for setting the size of the frame, which will be used for the chart data analysis
and for the generation of the Antigrounding alerts, Area alerts and Navigational alerts:

● Ahead – window for the input of advance time for alert generation. The time value determines the length equal to
the distance covered by the ship proceeding at the current SOG (from 30 s to 60 min);
● Port – to set the width of the corridor to the left of the ship (from 0.1 to 4.0 NM);
● Starboard – to set the width of the corridor to the right of the ship (from 0.1 to 4.0 NM);
● Show safety frame – to turn on the display of a safety frame on the ECDIS task screen.

In the Ahead, Port and Starboard input boxes, set the necessary values which will determine the shape of the
safety frame.
Select the Show safety frame checkbox to show the safety frame. The safety frame is displayed with a black
outlined rectangle:

The Safety parameters group is intended for setting and viewing safety parameters in the Navigation Mode:

● Shallow contour - in the ENC, the four shades mode defines the value of the shallow contour affecting colours of
depth areas (dark blue for depth areas with values shallower than the shallow contour);
● Safety contour - mariner-selected contour to distinguish on the display between safe and unsafe water;
● Safety depth - mariner-defined depth to emphasize soundings on the display equal to or less than this value;
● Deep contour - in the ENC, the four shades mode defines the value of deep contour affecting colours of depth
areas (the lightest S-52 colour for depth areas deeper than the deep contour).

154 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Monitoring of Safety Alerts

Use the Shallow contourline to enter the value of the shallow contour affecting colours of depth areas for ENC
format charts:

Use the Safety contour line to enter the safety contour value:

Press Yes to confirm the changes you have made:

NOTE: The alert is generated exclusively by the safety contour value, even if the shallow contour value is smaller
than the safety contour value.

Use the Safety depth line to enter the safety depth value:

Press Yes to confirm the changes you have made:

Use the Deep contour line to enter the deep contour value affecting colours of depth areas for ENC format charts.

In the Source of safety parameters group, select the source which the safety parameters will be taken from for the
route monitoring:

If the route is not loaded for monitoring, the Fixed radio button will be selected automatically, safety parameters set
in the Safety parameters group are used for monitoring dangers.
As a route to be monitored is loaded, the last operator-selected From route or Fixed value is set automatically.
If the Fixed value is selected, the safety parameters set in the Safety parameters group are used (see also
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section
Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts).
If the From route value is selected, safety parameters are selected by using the procedure detailed in Chapter 4,
section Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode, paragraph Selection of Safety Parameters when
Loading Monitored Route).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 155

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Setting of Safety Parameters in Sailing in the Vicinity

of Dangerous Objects
The Antigrounding alerts group contains checkboxes for enabling/disabling the following safety parameters:

● Safety contour – to enable the alarm generation upon the approach to the depth line less than the Safety contour
value;
● Nav. hazard – to enable the caution/ warning generation upon the approach to the navigational hazards (for the
list of objects see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional
Description, Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts);
● Highlight Danger - to turn on the highlight the dangers on the Chart panel.

Select the Safety contour checkbox to turn on the alarm generation as the safety contour is crossed by the safety
frame.
Select the activated Nav. hazard checkbox to enable the caution ( warning) generation when a navigational hazard
turns up within the safety frame (see also paragraph Setting Priority for Navigational and Area Alerts).
Select the Highlight Danger checkbox to turn on the highlighting of dangers on the Chart panel falling within the
safety frame.

NOTE: If at least one checkbox in the Antigrounding alerts group is cleared, the Chart panel displays the SF CNT
important indication (for details see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 4, section Indications, paragraph Important Indications).

Monitoring of Crossing of Area Limits in IMO

and Additional Groups
The IMO Areas tab containing checkboxes for the selection (assigning danger-to-navigation status) from the main
areas tracked in accordance with IEC-61174 standard.

156 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Monitoring of Safety Alerts

The Additional Areas tab containing checkboxes for the selection (assigning danger-to-navigation status) from the
additional group of the areas that will be tracked.

Select the required areas checkboxes in the IMO Areas tab.

Switch to the Additional Areas tab. Select the required areas checkboxes in the Additional Areas tab.

NOTE: Priorities (caution/warning) for alerts caused by the safety frame crossing the selected areas are set on the
Area alerts config tab (see also paragraph Setting Priority for Navigational and Area Alerts.

For details see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description,
Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts.

Setting Priority for Navigational and Area Alerts

Switch to the Safety alerts config tab.

Click the button with the required list of alerts:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 157

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

On the drop-down list which will open, the Caution priority is set by default for all the alerts.
Set the necessary priorities (caution/warning) for alerts on the list:

Click the activated Apply button to save all the changes made.

Safety Tools
Clearing Bearing
Clearing Bearing allows the construction of visual bearings around dangers at an appropriate distance so that they
can be monitored visually.

ATTENTION! All the Clearing Bearings are synchronized on all the network stations.

Open the Overlays panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

158 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Safety Tools

Use the tab in the top part of the Overlays panel which will open up, to switch to the Clearing Bearing page.

Press the Show CBs button to display Clearing Bearings (CBs) on the ECDIS task screen.

NOTE: The Show CBs button on the Clearing Bearing page is synchronized with the Clearing Bearing
checkbox in the Info Layers drop-down list on the Control Panel, therefore, its status (on/off) depends on whether
this checkbox is selected or not.

Creating Clearing Bearing

Press the New button.

In the window which will open up, set the following Clearing Bearing parameters:
1. Select the Clearing Bearing type: Port or Starboard. To do this, press respectively the Port or Stb button.

NOTE: Selection of the Clearing Bearing means which bearing to the selected reference point will be safe. When the
Port button is pressed, any bearing Not More Than (NMT) the set value will be considered to be safe. When the Stb
button is pressed, any bearing Not Less Than (NLT) the set value will be considered to be safe.

2. Use the Comment input box to enter necessary comments on the Clearing Bearing.
3. If the Clearing Bearing is required to be referenced to a chart object, select the Snap checkbox. In this case, the
chart object name will automatically appear in the table Comment column.

WARNING! It is easier to enter the parameters listed below direct on the chart with the aid of the graphics cursor
called by pressing the Edit by cursor button. If their values are known in advance, this can be done in the relevant
input boxes.

4. Use the Bearing input box to enter the necessary Clearing Bearing value .
5. Use the Range start input box to enter distance from the reference point to the beginning of the Clearing Bearing
(cannot be larger than the next value).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 159

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

6. Use the Range end input box to enter the distance from the reference point to the end of the Clearing Bearing.
7. Use the Reference input box to enter the reference point coordinates.
To plot the Clearing Bearing on the chart, press the Edit by cursor button.

The acquisition marker will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Select object information window with the cursor coordinates.

Position the acquisition marker in the reference point of the Clearing Bearing and press the left trackball button, the
acquisition marker will change its form to the graphics cursor.

Select the Clearing Bearing reference point and press the left trackball button

160 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Safety Tools

Use the ERBL to set the Start point of the Clearing Bearing line and press the left trackball button.

Then set the end point of the Clearing Bearing line and press the left trackball button.

The Clearing Bearing will be set in the specified coordinates on the Chart panel.
The table on the Clearing Bearing page shows the Clearing Bearing and its parameters.

You can use an alternative Clearing Bearing creation procedure by pressing the New by Cursor button. In this case,
the acquisition marker will first appear. Use this marker to plot the Clearing Bearing on the Chart panel as described
above, and after the exit from the graphic editing mode, the Clearing Bearing parameters editing window will open up.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 161

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Clearing Bearing Editing

The Clearing Bearing editing process can be divided into the editing of the Clearing Bearing and its parameters.
Select the necessary Clearing Bearing from the table. You can also choose the Clearing Bearing on the chart by
pressing the Select by Cursor button: use the acquisition marker to select the necessary Clearing Bearing, it is
then automatically selected in the table.
Edit the following Clearing Bearing parameters:

● Comment. Position the cursor on the Comment element cell; double click
the left trackball button to activate the cell.
Enter the new comment and press the <Enter> key.

● Display. By default, the display on the Chart panel is turned on for all the Clearing Bearings. To turn off the
Clearing Bearing display, clear the checkbox in the Display column.

● Type. Click on the Type element cell. From the drop-down list, select the necessary
Clearing Bearing type (see the previous paragraph).

● Bearing. Position the cursor on the Bearing element cell; double click the left trackball
button to activate the cell.
Enter the new bearing and press the <ENTER> key.
● Range from. Position the cursor on the Range from element cell; double click the left
trackball button to activate the cell.
Enter the new distance from the reference point to the beginning of the Clearing Bearing
(cannot be larger than the next value) and press the <ENTER> key.
● Range to. Position the cursor on the Range to element cell; double click the left trackball
button to activate the cell.
Enter the new distance from the reference point to the Clearing Bearing end and press the
<ENTER> key.

● Reference. The coordinates of the Clearing Bearing reference point cannot be changed at the parameters editing
stage.
To edit the Clearing Bearing graphically, press the Edit by cursor button.

The acquisition marker will appear on the Chart panel. Use the acquisition marker to select the necessary
Clearing Bearing and press the left trackball button.

162 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Safety Tools

The acquisition marker will be automatically positioned on the Clearing Bearing reference point. Move the acquisition
marker to the new reference point as required.

Press the left trackball button. The acquisition marker will turn to the ERBL; use it to set the distance from the
reference point to the beginning of the Clearing Bearing line.

Press the left trackball button and use the ERBL to set the distance from the reference point to the end of the
Clearing Bearing line and its new direction. Press the left trackball button.
The Clearing Bearing parameters editing window will open up.

Edit the necessary Clearing Bearing parameters as described above.

Press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 163

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Fast Clearing Bearing Search

Use the table on the Clearing Bearing page or the cursor (called by pressing the Select by Cursor button) to select
the necessary object on the Chart panel.

Press the Focus button which has been activated.

The Chart panel will display the selected Clearing Bearing on a suitable scale chart.

Deleting Clearing Bearing

From the table on the Clearing Bearing page select the object to be deleted.

Press the Remove button which has been activated.

164 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Safety Tools

To delete a Clearing Bearing with the aid of the cursor, press the Remove by Cursor button.

The acquisition marker will appear on the Chart panel. Use the marker to select the Clearing Bearing which should
be deleted and press the left trackball button.
To delete all the Clearing Bearings, press the Clear All button.

Saving and Loading Configuration

There is a capability to save, load and delete configurations for Limiting Danger Line and Clearing Bearings; this
operation is performed in the Configuration group on a relevant page.
Create the necessary configuration. To save the configuration, enter the configuration name in the input line of the
Configuration group.

Press the Save button which will be enabled. The saved configuration will include all the objects of this page.
To link a configuration to the existing route, press the Link to Route button.

From the drop-down list, select the necessary route. Press the Save button.

NOTE: When the route is loaded for monitoring, this configuration will be automatically loaded.

To load a configuration, press the Load button.

From the drop-down list, select the necessary configuration.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 165

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To delete a configuration, press the Delete button.

From the drop-down list, select the necessary configuration.

Press the Yes button to confirm the deleting.

The configuration files are accessible with the use of the Data Tool utility, in the Configs group of the Clearing
Bearing feature, and can be imported/exported from/to another PC.

Monitoring of Navigational Alerts

ATTENTION! Setting parameters for navigational alerts is available only on the station with the MASTER status .

Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Navigational Alertspage.

166 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Monitoring of Navigational Alerts

The Primary/Secondary difference group is used for entering the maximum difference between the readings of
positioning systems, and for turning on their monitoring.

In the Prim/Sec diverged line, enter the divergence distance between the coordinates from the primary and
secondary positioning methods. Select the activated Prim/Sec diverged checkbox for the warning to be generated
when the set value is exceeded.
The Chart group is used for turning on the monitoring of electronic charts under the own ship.

Select the Off chart warning checkbox to enable generation of a warning if the ship sails beyond the chart boundary
with the Chart Autoload mode off.
The Anchor watch setting group is used for setting the maximum distance (safety ring) from the anchor points. As
the ship moves beyond any of the formed circles, a warning is generated.

In the Safety ring column enter the maximum distance ( Safety ring radius) from anchor points 1 and 2. Position of
anchor points 1 and 2 is set on the ship contour during the installation in the System Configuration utility. (see
document Multifunctional Display. (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration ,
paragraph MFD Settings )
Select the checkboxes in the Alert column to turn on the warning generation as the ship sails beyond the set
distances.
Select the Show anchor watch rings checkbox to show the anchor watch rings around the anchor position after the
anchor drop points are set.
To set the position of dropping anchor 1, press the Down button in row 1.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 167

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In this case, the anchor position will correspond to the position of anchor point 1 at the moment when the Down

button is pressed. The anchor position is marked with a special symbol .

Along the line connecting the positions of the anchor and anchor point 1, bearing and distance between them is
dynamically displayed.

To set the anchor position, use the cursor to press the By Cursor button in row 1. Indicate the anchor position with
the cursor on the Chart Panel.

Press the left trackball button.

Use similar procedures if it is necessary to set anchor 2.
Press the left trackball button.
The Sounder group is used for turning on monitoring of the echo sounder readings and contains the following
checkboxes:
● Sounder depth – to enable and enter the minimum depth value for an alert generated upon the reception of data
from the echo sounder;
● Sounder failure – to enable/disable the Sounder: no input caution.

Use the Sounder depth line to enter the safety depth value from the echo sounder. Select the activated Sounder
depth checkbox for turning on the alert generation as a depth smaller than the set one is detected.

168 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Setting of Safety Parameters • Monitoring of Time

Monitoring of Time
Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the General page.

Setting of End-of-Watch Alerts

The End of Watch Caution group is intended for setting the period of time before the end of the current watch when
an alert will be generated. The order of watches is set in the System Configuration utility (see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD
Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings).

Use the End of Watch notification input line to enter the time before the end of the current watch when the
notification should be generated.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 169

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Timer Setting

The Timer alarm group is designed for the control of the timer functions:
● Every – setting of the alarm to be generated over the time specified in the line to the right;
● At – setting of the alarm to be generated at the time specified in the line to the right;
● Off – to turn off timer functions.

To set the alarm generation over equal time intervals, select the Every checkbox and enter value of the alarm
generation time interval in the input line.

To set the alarm to be generated at a certain time select the At checkbox and enter the alarm generation time (ship
time) to the right.

170 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions •

Using Logging Functions

This chapter describes the procedure used for handling information archived in the course of the MFD operation.

Using Ship Log Book 172

Creating User Accounts 173
Search for Events in Ship Log Book 175
Events Filtering 176
Custom Events Creation 177
Event Entering and Editing 179
Ship Log Book Editing 184
Separating Voyages 185
Work with Archive 187
Ship Log Book Printout 189
Using Electronic System Log Book 193
Own Ship Track in ECDIS Task 196
Setting Track Display Elements 196
Viewing Archive Tracks 199

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 171

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Using Ship Log Book

Open the Log Book panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Log Book panel which will open up, to switch to the Log Book page.

The Ship Log Book page is designed for recording events which occurred during the ECDIS task operation and
their synchronizing among the stations. The table is a set of rows (events) and of columns (event parameters). For
the set of events which are automatically shown in the Ship Log Book, see Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 6, section Ship Log Book, paragraph Ship Log Book
Formation Principles. Besides, the operator can enter events manually, edit events and enter comments on the
events. The events editing and input of comments is password protected.

NOTE: The Ship Log Book always opens up on the current date

172 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

Creating User Accounts

Before starting work with the Ship Log Bbook, it is necessary to create user accounts. Account attributes are used
as a digital signature when an event is entered or edited in the Ship Log Book. The user who has no own account can
only read the Ship Log Book.
Open the Log Book panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Log Book panel which will open up, to switch to the Log Book Settings page. On
the Log Book Settings page switch to the Log Book Accounts tab.

This tab is intended for creating accounts for the Ship Log Book only. Accounts which are created in the System
Configuration utility are only used for deleting accounts from the Ship Log Book.
To create a new user account press the Create user button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 173

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In a special window the user should enter the following parameters:

● Rank. The user can select one of the offered ranks or specify his/her own (i.e., “Master”);
● Name;
● Password (special symbols like space, points, etc. are not permitted. When these are entered, there is a
message that unacceptable symbols have been entered);
● Password confirmation;
● Security question for restoring the forgotten password. At the account creation stage the operator can select any
question and answer it in the Answer field;
● Answer to the Security question.
The rank and name combination will serve as the user account.

To change the user account (rank, name, password) select it from the table and press the Edit user button.

Enter the “password” for the relevant currently edited user account and edit it.
To remove a user account, press the Remove user button. The deleting password is advised by the MFD distributor
upon the master’s request.

In the password-protected operations, the password input box has been supplemented with the Forgot? button. This
button is intended for restoring a forgotten password. Press this button to open a dialogue box in which use the Your
answer field to enter an answer to the Security question (set at the account creation stage).

174 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

If the reply is entered correctly, the Your password field will display a password set by the operator at the account
creation stage.

Press the Ok button, the password will be automatically applied to the Edit user window.
The Security question and Your password fields are not editable in this window.
Account parameters are stored on all the WS's of the bridge.

Search for Events in Ship Log Book

NOTE: The Ship Log Book page stores date-by-date events for the last 90 days, whereupon the events are moved
to the archive.

Press the Date button and select the date which the Ship Log Book entries will be shown for.

When a date is selected, the drop-down list opens up showing the events which occurred within the selected 24 hours.
Select the necessary event. The Comment tab will display the last pertinent comment related to this event.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 175

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To display the event position, on the Chart panel press the Focus button.

The selected event mark is displayed in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10
seconds.

Events Filtering
To filter the display of events in the Ship Log Book, press the Filter button in the top part of the page.

NOTE: Filtering is only possible for events entered by the operator manually (default and custom).

Turned on by default is the display of all default and custom events available in the Enter Event control. When a new
custom event is created, it automatically becomes available in the Filter drop down list.
To turn off the display of some events, clear checkboxes next to the names of these events.
To select all the events, press the right trackball button and choose the Select all menu item.

176 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

To cancel selection of all the previously selected events, choose the Deselect all menu item.
Events can also be sorted by alphabet, which is done by clicking on the name of the Default/Custom column.
Press the Apply button.
If display of some of the events was disabled, the "*" symbol appears on the button.

Custom Events Creation

In the Ship Log Book, there is a list of default events. The user can create own custom events as required, which can
be recorded in the Ship Log Book.

NOTE: Custom Events can only be entered on a WS with backup-0 and backup-1 priority, see also document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 6, section Ship Log
Book, paragraph Ship Log Book Formation Principles.

Press the Enter Event button.

In the window which will open up, press the Create custom event button.

The event with the name “CustomXX” will appear on the Custom list. The created custom event is synchronized
automatically among the stations of the bridge.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 177

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Edit the event name. To do this, double click the event name.

Type the necessary event name and press the left trackball button.
To add and edit a new custom event, you can also use the context menu called by clicking the right trackball button.

To delete a custom event, select it and press the right trackball button.

From the drop-down list select Delete.

Press OK.
To exit from the window, click the cursor in a point on the ECDIS task screen.

178 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

Event Entering and Editing

The event Position is entered in the Ship Log Book automatically, by default the 60 min interval is set. To set the
required interval, press the Position Interval button.

Select the necessary time period. The selected setting is synchronised automatically among the stations of the bridge.
To manually enter an event in the Ship Log Book, press the Enter Event button.

Select the necessary event from the Default or Custom list boxes, press the Enter event in log book button. All
events from these lists can be sorted in the alphabetical order.

In the User accounts window which will appear, use the Comment input box to enter comments on the event.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 179

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

For each event recorded manually in the Ship Log Book, input of a personal password, rank and name of the operator
who entered the event is required. From the User drop-down list in the User accounts window which will
appear,select your user account and enter the password (user accounts and password settings are made on the Log
Book Accounts tab of the Log Book Settings page, see above item User Accounts Creation).

Press the OK button.

The event is shown in the Ship Log Book. The data available in the table columns as of the event occurrence time is
shown in the Ship Log Book automatically.
To view the history of an event /comment entered for this event, switch to the History list tab.

There are some slight differences in the procedure of entering the Hand over watch event in which both navigators
take part: officers going off and on the watch.

180 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

Press the Enter Event button.

Select the Hand over watch event from the Default list and press the Enter event in log book button.
From the User drop-down list in the Hand over watch window which will appear, the officer going off the watch
selects his/her user account and enters the password.

Press the OK button.

From the User drop-down list in the Hand over watch window which will appear, the officer going on the watch
selects his/her user account and enters the password.

Press the OK button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 181

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The event is shown in the Ship Log Book. The Comment tab will display information on the person going off/on the
watch.
For rules for the input and display of comments in the Ship Log Book, see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-
Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 6, section Ship Log Book, paragraph Making
Corrections and Safety.
It is in much the same way that the Change of command event is entered, in which both masters take part. This
event serves for denoting the account of which master is currently active, i.e., who is in command of the ship at each
particular moment of time.
Press the Enter Event button.
Select the Change of command event from the Default list and press the Enter event in log book button.

The master who is passing the command enters his/her password.

Press the Ok button.

From the User drop-down list in the Select user window which will appear, the master assuming the command
selects his/her user account and enters the password.

Press the Ok button.

182 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

The event is shown in the Ship Log Book. The Comment tab will display information on the person who has
passed/assumed the command. Comments on this event cannot be edited, the Edit button is disabled.
If during the creation of the Change of command event, in the Log Book Accounts tab there is not a single user
with the "Captain" rank, a press on the Enter event in log book button, will display the Select user window:

Press the Create captain account button. The Log Book Accounts tab will open on the Log Book Settings page.
Use this tab to create a new captain account as described in User Accounts Creation paragraph (see above). Then
run the procedure for creating the Change of command event anew.

The name of the master who has assumed the command is automatically entered in the Master box in the Print
Reports tab on the Log Book Settings page of the Log Book panel (see section Ship Log Book Printout).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 183

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

If the active master’s account is deleted, the Change of command event with an appropriate comment will be
automatically entered in the Ship Log Book:

Ship Log Book Editing

The Ship Log Book enables editing of event parameters from the Chart Track to RPM columns only. Use the
trackball to position the cursor on the cell which should be edited and make a double left click.

Roll the trackball or use the keyboard to enter the necessary value and press the left trackball button or the <ENTER>
key. To cancel input of the correction, press the right trackball button.
In the User accounts window which will appear, enter the comment (if necessary), select your user account and
enter the password (user accounts and password settings are made on the Log Book Accounts tab of the Log
Book Settings page, see above item User Accounts Creation).

184 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Ship Log Book

Press the OK button.

To view the corrections entered for the given event, switch to the History list tab.

Separating Voyages
To differentiate the log book events by voyages and to enable the subsequent display of events connected with a
certain voyage, the capability to specify the voyage beginning and end is provided.
At the beginning of the voyage, press the Start voyage button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 185

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

From the User drop-down list in the User accounts window which will appear, select the user account and enter the
comment and password.

Press the Ok button.

Use the relevant boxes to enter the voyage number, port of departure and port of destination. Press the Ok button.

The event is shown in the Ship Log Book. The voyage number is shown on the button in the top right corner of the
page. Comments on this event cannot be edited, the Edit button is disabled.
After the end of the voyage press the button with its number in the top right corner of the Ship Log Book page.

186 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Work with Archive

From the User drop-down list in the User accounts window which will appear, select the user account and enter the
comment and password.

Press the Ok button.

The event is shown in the Ship Log Book. Comments on this event cannot be edited, the Edit button is disabled.
The End of voyage event is just a mark to identify the voyage period (for database query, for printing purposes).

Work with Archive

Open the Log Book panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 187

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Log Book panel which will open up, to switch to the Archive page.

The Archive page is designed for displaying archived Ship Log Books. For the archiving rules see Multifunctional
Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 6 document, section Ship Log
Book, paragraph Archiving Ship Log Book.
Press the Ship Log Book button and select the necessary archive from the list box.

NOTE: In the Ship Log Book events are stored for 90 days. Then they are moved automatically to the archive. In the
archive they are stored as long as there is space on the disk.

The page will display records contained in the archive.

188 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Ship Log Book Printout

Press the Jump to date button and select the date which the Ship Log Book records will be displayed for.

The table will display Ship Log Book events starting from the first event of the selected date. It should be noted that
on the Archive page you can only view the Ship Log Book.
To filter events on the Archive page you can also use a filter described in the Events Filtering paragraph of the Using
Ship Log Book section.

Ship Log Book Printout

Open the Log Book panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 189

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Log Book panel which will open up, to switch to the Log Book Settings page. On
the Log Book Settings page switch to the Print Reports tab.

In the Header group enter the following information in the input fields:
● Gross tons – gross tonnage of the vessel;
● Net tons – net tonnage of the vessel;
● DWT tons – vessel's deadweight capacity.

The Captain’s name in the Master input line is entered automatically with a change of command (see section Using
Ship Log Book, paragraph Event Entering and Editing). The name of the master who assumed the command will be
shown in the log book printout.
If for some reasons the name of the person who assumed the command is not entered (or the active master’s name
is deleted) the Header group will look like follows:

Press the Change of command button and enter the name of the person who assumed command as described in
the Event Entering and Editing paragraph of the Using Ship Log Book section.

190 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Ship Log Book Printout

In the Events group select the printout range: Whole logbook, Today or Dates. In the case of Dates, use the From
and To input boxes to set the time interval for the printout of the Ship Log Book.
If several voyages fall within the selected time interval, during the printout they will be shown with their respective
numbers. The new voyage information is started on a new page of the report.

NOTE: By using the Data filter you can also print out an archive Ship Log Book.

If it is necessary to print out the Ship Log Book for a certain voyage, select the Voyage checkbox.

From the drop-down list select the necessary voyage(s) and select the checkbox(es) next to its/their name(s).
While printing out the Ship Log Book, it is also possible to filter events by their names. To do this, press the Filter button.

Turned on by default, is the display of all the default and custom events available in the Enter Event control (see
section Using Ship Log Book, paragraph Event Entering and Editing).
To turn off the print out of some events, clear the checkboxes next to the names of these events.
You can also use a context menu for selecting/deselecting all the events, and sorting as described for the Ship Log
Book filter in the Events Filtering paragraph of Using Ship Log Book section.
Press the Apply button.
If display of some of the events was disabled, the "*" symbol appears on the button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 191

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the Orientation group select the text orientation on the page during the printout: Portrait or Landscape.

Select the printout range: Whole logbook, Today or Dates. In the case of Dates, use the From and To input boxes
to set the time interval for the printout of the Ship Log Book.

NOTE: By using the Data filter you can also print out the Ship Log Book archive .

For the Ship Log Book print preview, press the Print preview button.

Data entered in the Header group is displayed on the title sheet on the Ship Log Book. On the subsequent pages,
headers display the Ship name, IMO No, Voyage Data.

192 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Electronic System Log Book

If voyages are selected for printing out, the Ship Log Book looks as follows:

In this case all the events are sorted by voyages, and events of every new voyage start to be displayed on a new
page.
Close the Print Preview window and press the Print button.

To convert the Ship Log Book to the *.pdf file, press the Export to PDF button.

To convert the Ship Log Book to the *.html file, press the Export to HTML button.

Files has names in the Log Book (DD-Month-YYYY - DD-Month-YYYY).* format, dates in the name show the time
interval whose data was included in the file.
Files can be copied by using the Data Tool utility (the Track feature, the Ship's Log Book (PDF) and Ship's Log
Book (HTML) file groups) for subsequent use.

Using Electronic System Log Book

ATTENTION! The Electronic System log is not synchronised in the net among the WS’s.

Open the Log Book panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 193

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Log Book panel which will open up, to switch to the System Log page.

The System Log page is designed for the recording of events which occurred during the ECDIS task operation. The
table is a set of columns (events) and of rows (event parameters). By default, the table reflects the following event
parameters:
● Date – date of the event;
● Time – time of the event (UTC);
● Event – name of the event;
● Primary Sensor – primary positioning system;
● Secondary Sensor – secondary positioning system;
● L/L – event latitude/longitude coordinate;
● Offset L/L – event latitude/longitude offset;
● Prim/Sec Diverge – distance and direction to the secondary positioning system (large – distance exceeding the
limit set in the safety parameters);
● COG - SOG – course and speed values received from the positioning system;
● HDG - LOG – heading and speed values received from the compass and log;
● Average speed – average speed in the last 10 minutes;
● WatchDist-Log – distance covered during the watch (by chart – by log);
● DAY DIST-LOG – distance covered in 24 hours (by chart – by log);
● VOY DIST-LOG – summary distance passed (by chart – by log);
● Echo Sounder – depth from the sounder or entered manually if the sounder is not connected in the System
Configuration utility;
● Charts displayed – charts loaded for proceeding in the Navigation Mode, the source specified (ENC, TRS – TX-97);
● Wind direction – true wind direction;
● Wind speed – true wind speed;
● Water temperature – water temperature.
● Voice comment – voice comment. The table cell has a control panel containing the following buttons:

● to rewind to the start;

● to play back a voice comment;
● to stop the playback.
The following system log fields are filled in by the operator manually:
● Remarks – operator notes;
● Wave direction – wave direction value entered by the operator;
● Wave Height – wave height value entered by the operator;
● Air temperature – air temperature value entered by the operator;
● Pressure – atmospheric pressure value entered by the operator;
● Visibility – visibility range value entered by the operator;
● Engine RPM – main engine rpm value entered by the operator.

194 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Using Electronic System Log Book

To do this, position the free cursor on the necessary cell and press the left trackball button. Type the necessary
message and press the left trackball button or the <ENTER> key:

In the Settings group select the necessary date (the current date is set by default):

To change contents of the electronic system log book (delete unnecessary event parameters), press the Fields button:

Clear checkboxes of the unnecessary event parameters.

By default, it is only the Main group of events which is displayed in the system log (see document Multifunctional
Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 6, section Electronic System Log
Book, paragraph Electronic System Log Book Formations Principles). To display other groups of events in the
system log, press the Filter button in the Settings group.

Select checkboxes of the necessary parameter groups.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 195

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To set the value of the total covered distance to zero, press the Reset Dist. button in the Settings group.
To print out the electronic system log book, pressthe Print button in the Settings group.

NOTE: The printer is required to be connected to the one of WS’s. For the printer to be used as a network printer, the
printer settings should be made.

Use the From and To input boxes to set the time interval for the printout of the electronic system log book events,
and press the Print button.

Own Ship Track in ECDIS Task

Setting Track Display Elements
Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

196 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Own Ship Track in ECDIS Task

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

In the Past track settings group of the Route Monitoring page which will open up, set the colour of the track
segment, which is being formed, by selecting it from the offered the Track colour palette.

Press the Plot interval button.

In the list which will open up, select the track plot interval and press the left trackball button.
Use the Own ship track input line to enter the time value which the length of the displayed own ship track will
correspond to.

The Show primary track checkbox is selected by default.

If it is necessary to turn off the display of a track from the primary positioning system, clear this checkbox.
If it is necessary to turn on the display of a track and ship symbol from the secondary positioning system on the
Chart panel, select the Show secondary track/position checkbox.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 197

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

If it is necessary to turn on the display of time labels on the primary and secondary tracks select the Showtime-
labels checkbox.

Press the Plot interval button.

In the list which will open up, select the track plot interval and press the left trackball button.
Open the Log Book panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Log Book panel which will open up, to switch to the System Log page. In the left-
hand part of the System Log page, press the Filter button.

198 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Using Logging Functions • Own Ship Track in ECDIS Task

Select checkboxes of the event groups which are required to be displayed on the track.

These events will be shown in the form of time tags on the set own ship track

Viewing Archive Tracks

Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 199

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the Past track settings group of the Route Monitoring page which will open up, press the Plot interval button:

In the list which will open up, select the track plot interval and press the left trackball button.
Press the Track history button:

In the list which will open up, select the date of the track required to be displayed, and press the left trackball button.
The selected date track is displayed on the Chart panel.
To display the entire own ship track for the selected date on the Chart panel, press the Focus on Track button.

200 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating •

Manual Updating
This chapter describes the procedure used in the handling of updating objects.

Turning On/Off Display of Updating Objects and Their Attributes 202

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects 203
Plotting Point Type Objects 204
Plotting Lines and Areas 206
Plotting Text Object 209
Plotting Depth Object 211
Plotting Shapes 213
Assigning “Attached File” Attribute 220
Editing Updating Objects 222
Editing Updating Objects Attributes 222
Editing Object Coordinates 224
Deleting Updating Object 226
Restoring Deleted Object 227
Search for Updating Objects 229

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 201

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Turning On/Off Display of Updating Objects

and Their Attributes
ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

To open the Man Corr panel completely press the button.

202 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

To turn on/off the display of updating objects attributes on the ECDIS task screen, on Display Options page press
the following buttons:
● Attachments – to turn on highlighting of objects with attached files;
● Colored – to turn on orange coloured highlighting of updating objects;
● Timed objects – to turn on the display of temporary updating objects until the time when they become effective;
● Deleted – to turn on highlighting of deleted objects.

Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen, press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

The updating object creating and plotting procedure consists of four stages:
● selection of the object category and type;
● assigning of attributes to the object (except attached files);
● plotting of an object;
● assigning of the “attached file” attribute.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 203

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Plotting Point Type Objects

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Symbol item.

Select the type of updating object symbol from the table and press the left trackball button.
Set the updating display time (“Temporary updating” attribute). To do this, select the Start checkbox. Use the
tracball to set the start date and time of the updating object display and press the right trackball button.

Press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.
Select the End checkbox and set the updating object display end date and time.
Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in the Text input line (information will be displayed on the chart).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in the Info field (information will not be displayed unless
Info function is used).

Select the Danger checkbox (“Danger to navigation” attribute) as required.

204 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in the Depth line.

Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the updating object.
If it is necessary to add a new symbol, select the Clear attribute fields for every new object checkbox for clearing
all the attribute input fields.
To plot the updating object on the chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Symbol information window with the cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the required coordinates.

Press the left trackball button: the point type object will be set in the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 205

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Information on the plotted updating object will be displayed in the table on the Man Corr panel.

Press the Save button.

Plotting Lines and Areas

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Line item.

Set the updating object colour (“Object colour” attribute). Select it from the Color palette.

206 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Set the updating object display time (“Temporary updating” attribute), text (“Text” attribute), required information
(“Object information” attribute), “Danger to navigation” attribute and the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute)
(see paragraph Plotting Point Type Object).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the updating object.
To plot the updating object on chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Line information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the initial point and press the left trackball button.
To set lines and areas, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor to the next point and press the left button
again. Repeat the procedure until you set the required number of points.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 207

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

After the input of the last point of the line or area, press the right trackball button: the cursor will change its form, and
the object will be set in the specified coordinates:
● line by the specified points;

● area by the points, the first and the last of them connected.

Information on the plotted updating object will be displayed in the table on the Man Corr panel.

Press the Save button.

208 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Plotting Text Object

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Text item.

In the Text input window enter the necessary text.

Set the updating object colour (“Object colour” attribute). Select it from the Color palette.

Set the updating object display time (“Temporary updating” attribute), required information (“Object information”
attribute), and the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) (see paragraph Plotting Point Type Object).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the updating object.
To plot the updating object on the chart, press the Add object button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 209

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Text information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the required coordinates.

Press the left trackball button: the text type updating object will be set in the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

210 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Information on the plotted updating object will be displayed in the table on the Man Corr panel.

Press the Save button.

Plotting Depth Object

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Depth item.

In the Depth input window, enter the necessary depth.

Set the updating object colour (“Object colour” attribute). Select it from the Color palette.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 211

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Set the updating object display time (“Temporary updating” attribute), text (“Text” attribute), required information
(“Object information” attribute), “Danger to navigation” attribute and the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute)
(see paragraph Plotting Point Type Object).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the updating object.
To plot the updating object on the chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Depth information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the required coordinates.

Press the left trackball button: the depth type updating object will be set in the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

212 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Information on the plotted updating object will be displayed in the table on the Man Corr panel.

Press the Save button.

Plotting Shapes
Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Shapes item.

Select from the table the type of the line (Line) delineating the shape and of the shape infill (Fill):

Set the updating object colour (“Object colour” attribute). Select it from the Color palette.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 213

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Set the updating object display time (“Temporary” attribute), updating object text (“Text” attribute), required
information (“Object information” attribute), “Danger to navigation” attribute and the required depth value (the “Object
depth” attribute) (see item Plotting Point Type Objects).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the updating object
Press the button in the top left corner to select the form of a shape to be plotted.

Select the necessary shape from the list. Press the same button again.
Depending on the selected shape, plot the shape type updating object making additional settings as required:
● Ellipse:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Ellipse information window with cursor coordinates.

214 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Position the cursor in the central point and press the left trackball button.

After this, by moving the cursor set the necessary length of the major axis and press the left trackball button
again.

Make (correct) additional settings:

● Major axis – length of the ellipse major axis;
● Minor axis – length of the ellipse minor axis;
● Start angle – initial angle of the ellipse display sector relative to the minor axis;
● End angle – final angle of the ellipse display sector relative to the minor axis;
● Rotation angle – ellipse turn angle relative to the north.

Press the Apply button.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 215

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

● Rectangle:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Rectangle information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the initial point and press the left trackball button.
To set the rectangle shape, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor so as to construct a rectangle of
the necessary form and press the left button again.

After the input of the last point of the rectangle shape, press the right trackball button: the cursor will change its
form and the object will be set in the specified coordinates:

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

216 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

● Sector:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Sector information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the central point of the sector and press the left trackball button.

After this, by moving the cursor set the necessary radius and press the left trackball button again.

Make (correct) the necessary settings:

● Internal radius – length of the sector internal radius;
● External radius – length of the sector external radius;
● Start angle – initial angle of the display sector relative to the North;
● End angle – final angle of the display sector relative to North.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 217

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Apply button.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
● Polygon:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Polygon information window with the cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the initial point of the polygon shape and press the left trackball button.
To set the polygon shape, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor to the next point and press the left
button again. Repeat the procedure until you set the required number of points.

218 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

After the input of the last point of the polygon shape, press the right trackball button: the cursor will change its
form and the object will be set in the specified coordinates, the first and the last point of the plotted polygon
connected automatically:

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
● Circle:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Circle information window with the cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the central point and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 219

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

After this, move the cursor to the necessary radius and press the left trackball button again.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
Information on the plotted updating object will be displayed in the table on the Man Corr panel.

Press the Save button.

Assigning “Attached File” Attribute

To assign the “Attached file” attribute, the selected object should be plotted on chart.

To attach files (*.txt, *.rtf, *.bmp, *.doc, *gif, *.jpg, *.tif, *.pdf) press the Edit objects button in the right-
hand part of the panel.
From the drop-down list select the Attach. item.

220 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Creating and Plotting Updating Objects

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object and press the left trackball button.

The screen will display a window with lists of all the files available for attaching (to view the contents of the selected
file, press the View button on the appropriate panel). The list of files available for attaching is formed in the Data Tool
utility.

To attach a file (group of files) to the updating object, select it in the Available files group and press the Attach >>
button.

The file (group of files) will move to the Attached files group.
To view the file contents select it and press the View button.

Press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.
To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in the Attached files group and press the << Detach
button. The file (group of files) will move to the Available files group. Press the Apply button to confirm the changes
you have made.
Press the Save button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 221

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Editing Updating Objects

Editing Updating Objects Attributes
ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task screen.

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen, press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel. From the drop-down list select the Edit item.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object (in case of text objects, the acquisition point is
the first character) and press the left trackball button.

222 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Editing Updating Objects

The bottom part of the screen will display a window for editing updating objects.

Edit the updating object parameters so as display time (“Temporary updating” attribute), text (“Text” attribute),
required information (“Object information” attribute), “Danger to navigation” attribute and required depth value (“Object
depth” attribute) (see paragraph Plotting Point Type Object).
Set the updating object colour (“Object colour” attribute). Select it from the Color palette (except for the point type
objects).
Press the Apply button in the editing window to confirm the changes you have made.
Parameters of the line and circle type objects are edited in much the same way. To resize line or circle type objects
select this object as described above and press the Resize button in the editing window.

The graphics cursor will appear on the first point of the selected line object.

Move the cursor to the required coordinates. Press the left trackball button. The graphics cursor will change own
form to acquisition marker.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 223

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Repeat this operation for other updating object boundaries until the necessary configuration is set.

Press the right trackball button ,all the changes will be accepted.
Edit all the necessary updating objects.
To exit from the editing mode press the right trackball button.
To attach/detach files to/from the updating object, see paragraph Assigning “Attached File” Attribute.
Press the Save button.
The procedure of editing the updating object is completed.

Editing Object Coordinates

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

224 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Editing Updating Objects

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel. From the drop-down list select the Shift item.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object to be shifted (the first character of a text object or
a point in a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball button. Position the marker which will appear, in the new object coordinates within the
displayed Chart panel.

Press the left trackball button: the object will move to the specified coordinates.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 225

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the right trackball button to exit from the mode of updating the object coordinates.
Press the Save button.

Deleting Updating Object

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel. From the drop-down list select the Delete item.

226 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Editing Updating Objects

Position the acquisition marker , which will appear, on the object to be deleted (the first character of a text object
or a point in a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball button: the presentation of the object will be removed from the Chart panel.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the updating object deleting mode.
Press the Save button.

Restoring Deleted Object

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 227

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

Press the Deleted button in the Display Option page. The screen will display all the previously deleted objects
shown in the grey colour.

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel. From the drop-down list select the Restore item.

228 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Search for Updating Objects

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the deleted object (the first character of a text object or a
corner point of a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball button: the “Deleted object” attribute is removed, and the object is highlighted in accordance
with the previously made settings.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the deleted object restore mode.
Press the Save button.

Search for Updating Objects

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Man Corr panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 229

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To turn on/off the display of updating objects on the ECDIS task screen press the button in the top left corner of the
panel.

Select the required updating object in the left-hand part of the page and press the left trackball button. Coordinates of
the selected object will be displayed in the right-hand part of the page.

A double click of the left trackball button on the selected object line or its coordinates displays this object in the
centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10 seconds.

With the selection of line or area type objects, the right-hand part of the page displays coordinates of all the points,
which the line/area type object consists of.

230 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Manual Updating • Search for Updating Objects

A double click of the left trackball button on the coordinates of any point which the line/area type object consists of,
displays this point in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10 seconds.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 231

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Handling Maps
This chapter describes the procedure used in the handling of maps.

Creating and Saving Maps 233

Creating and Plotting Map Objects 235
Saving Map 252
Turning On/Off Display of Map Objects and Their Attributes 252
Map Loading and Unloading for Editing 253
Map Loading and Unloading for Monitoring 257
Editing Map Objects 260
Editing Map Object Attributes 260
Editing Map Object Coordinates 262
Deleting Map Object 264
Restoring Deleted Map Object 265
Merging Maps 266
Deleting Maps 268
Search for Map Objects 270
Map Handling in Network Configuration 271

232 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Creating and Saving Maps

ATTENTION! Symbol type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Maps panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

In the Maps panel which will open up, press the button in the top left part of the panel to turn on the maps display
on the ECDIS task screen.

The map creating procedure consists of following stages:

● creation of map objects:
● selection of the object category and type;
● assigning of attributes to the object (except the “Attached files”);
● plotting of an object;
● assigning of the file “Attached file” attribute
● saving the map.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 233

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Loaded Maps button.

The drop-down list displays all the loaded maps.

In the drop-down list press the Create new map button.

The map under the “NEWMAPXX*” name will be loaded.

NOTE: Next to the map name there is a “*” symbol which means that the map is edited but not saved. The unsaved
maps are not synchronized with other WS’s.

234 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

It is then necessary to plot on the map the map objects which may be of the following types:
● Symbol;
● Line;
● Text;
● Depth;
● Shapes.

Creating and Plotting Map Objects

Plotting Symbol Type Objects

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Symbol item.

NOTE: In this case the map editing mode is automatically switched on, the Monitoring button in the top right corner
is switched to the Editor position.

Press the button with the name of current symbol library. From the drop-down list, select the symbol library:

Select the map object symbol type from the table and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 235

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Set the display time (“Temporary” attribute). To do this, select the Start checkbox. Use the trackball to set the start
date and time of the map object display and press the right trackball button.

Press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.
Select the End checkbox and set the map object display end date and time.
Set the map object colour (“Object colour” attribute). Select it from the Color palette.

Enter the required text (“Text” attribute) in the Text input line (information will be displayed on the map).

Enter the required information (“Object information” attribute) in the Info field (information will not be displayed unless
the Info function is used).

Set the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) in the Depth line.

Select the Danger checkbox (“Danger to navigation” attribute) as required.

Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of map object.
If it is necessary to add a new symbol, select the Clear attribute fields for every new object checkbox for clearing
all the attribute input fields.
To plot a map object on the chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Symbol information window with cursor coordinates.

236 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Position the cursor which will appear on the graphic screen in the required coordinates.

Press the left trackball button: the symbol type object will be set in the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
Switch to the Find Object page. Information on the plotted map object will be displayed in the table on this page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 237

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Plotting Lines
Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Line item.

Select the type of line type map object from the table.

Set the map object colour (“Object colour” attribute), the map object display time (“Temporary” attribute), the map
object text (“Text” attribute), the necessary information (“Object information” attribute), the “Danger to navigation”
attribute and the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) (see item Plotting Symbol Type Objects).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the map object.
To plot a map object on the chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Line information window with cursor coordinates.

238 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Position the cursor in the initial point and press the left trackball button.
To set lines and areas, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor to the next point and press the left button
again. Repeat the procedure until you set the required number of points.

After the input of the last point of a line or area, press the right trackball button: the cursor will change its form, and
the object will be set in the specified coordinates:

Switch to the Find Object page. Information on the plotted user map object will be displayed in the table on this
page.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 239

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Plotting Text Object

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Text item.

In the Text input window enter the necessary text.

Set the map object colour (“Object colour” attribute), the map object display time (“Temporary” attribute), required
information (“Object information” attribute), the “Danger to navigation” attribute and the required depth value (“Object
depth” attribute) (see item Plotting Symbol Type Objects).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of a map object.
To plot a map object on the chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Text information window with cursor coordinates.

240 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Position the cursor in the required coordinates.

Press the left trackball button: the text type map object will be set in the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
Switch to the Find Object page. Information on the plotted map object will be displayed in the table on this page.

Plotting Depth Object

Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Depth item.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 241

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the Depth input box enter the necessary depth.

Set the map object colour (“Object colour” attribute), the map object display time (“Temporary” attribute), map object
text (“Text” attribute), required information (“Object information” attribute), the “Danger to navigation” attribute and the
required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) (see item Plotting Symbol Type Objects).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of a map object. Files are attached (“Attached file”
attribute) after the plotting of the map object.
To plot a map object on the chart, press the Add object button.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Add Depth information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the required coordinates.

242 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Press the left trackball button: the depth type map object will be set in the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
Switch to the Find object page. Information on the plotted map object will be displayed in the table on this page.

Plotting Shapes
Press the Add objects button.

From the drop-down list select the Shapes item.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 243

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Select from the table the type of the line (Line) delineating the shape and of the shape infill (Fill):

Set the map object colour (“Object colour” attribute), the map object display time (“Temporary” attribute), map object
text (the “Text” attribute), required information (“Object information” attribute), the “Danger to navigation” attribute and
the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) (see item Plotting Symbol Type Objects).
Files are attached (“Attached file” attribute) after the plotting of the map object
Press the button in the top left corner to select the form of a shape to be plotted.

Select the necessary shape from the list. Press the same button again.
Depending on the selected shape, plot the shape type map object making additional settings as required:
● Ellipse:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Ellipse information window with cursor coordinates.

244 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Position the cursor in the central point and press the left trackball button.

After this, by moving the cursor set the necessary length of the major axis and press the left trackball button
again.

Make (correct) additional settings:

● Major axis – length of the ellipse major axis;
● Minor axis – length of the ellipse minor axis;
● Start angle – initial angle of the ellipse display sector relative to the minor axis;
● End angle – final angle of the ellipse display sector relative to the minor axis;
● Rotation angle – ellipse turn angle relative to the north.

Press the Apply button.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 245

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

● Rectangle:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Rectangle information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the initial point and press the left trackball button.
To set the rectangle shape, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor so as to construct a rectangle of
the necessary form and press the left button again.

After the input of the last point of the rectangle shape, press the right trackball button: the cursor will change its
form and the object will be set in the specified coordinates:

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.

246 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

● Sector:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Sector information window with cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the central point of the sector and press the left trackball button.

After this, by moving the cursor set the necessary radius and press the left trackball button again.

Make (correct) the necessary settings:

● Internal radius – length of the sector internal radius;
● External radius – length of the sector external radius;
● Start angle – initial angle of the display sector relative to the North;
● End angle – final angle of the display sector relative to North.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 247

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Apply button.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
● Polygon:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Polygon information window with the cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the initial point of the polygon shape and press the left trackball button.
To set the polygon shape, after the plotting of the initial point, move the cursor to the next point and press the left
button again. Repeat the procedure until you set the required number of points.

248 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

After the input of the last point of the polygon shape, press the right trackball button: the cursor will change its
form and the object will be set in the specified coordinates, the first and the last point of the plotted polygon
connected automatically:

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
● Circle:

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display
the Add Circle information window with the cursor coordinates.

Position the cursor in the central point and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 249

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

After this, move the cursor to the necessary radius and press the left trackball button again.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The cursor will assume the shape of the ECDIS task
free cursor.
Switch to the Find object page. Information on the plotted map objects will be displayed in the table on this page.

Assigning “Attached File” Attribute

Press the button. Switch to the Find object page. Double click on the necessary map object. To be assigned
with the “Attached file” attribute, the selected object should be plotted on the chart.

To attach files (*.txt, *.rtf, *.bmp, *.doc, *gif, *.jpg, *.tif, *.pdf), press the Edit objects button in the right-
hand part of the panel .
From the drop-down list select the Attach item.

250 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Creating and Saving Maps

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object and press the left trackball button.

The screen will display a window with lists of all the files available for attaching (to view the contents of the selected
file, press the View button on the appropriate panel).
The list of files available for attaching is formed in the Data Tool utility.

To attach a file (group of files) to the map object, select it in the Available files group and press the Attach >>
button.

The file (group of files) will move to the Attached files group.
To view the file contents select it and press the View button.

Press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made.
To detach a file (group of files), select the necessary files in the Attached files group and press the << Detach
button. The file (group of files) will move to the Available files group. Press the Apply button to confirm the changes
you have made.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 251

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Saving Map
Use the procedure detailed above to create and plot the required number of map objects.
Press the Save button.

In the window which will open up, in the Chart name input line enter the map name. In the Comment input line enter
comments on the created map as required. Press the Save button in the window, the map will be saved.

Turning On/Off Display of Map Objects

and Their Attributes
To turn on/off the display of map object categories on the ECDIS task screen, switch to the Display options page.

By default, all buttons are depressed.

To turn on/off the display of various map object categories on the ECDIS task screen, press the following buttons in
the Objects group:

● – to turn on the display of all the "Symbol" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Line" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Text" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Depth" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Circle" category objects;

252 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Map Loading and Unloading for Editing

● – to turn on the display of all the "Polygon" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Rectangle" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Sector" category objects;

● – to turn on the display of all the "Ellipse" category objects.

To turn on/off the display of various map object attributes on the ECDIS task screen, press the following buttons in
the Attributes group:
● Texts – to turn on the display of the “Text” attributes;
● Depths – to turn on the display of the “Depth” attributes.

To turn on/off the display of other map object attributes on the ECDIS task screen, press the following buttons in the
Display options group:
● Attachments – to turn on the highlighting of objects with attached files;
● Colored – to turn on the display of the map object colour. With the button disabled, all the map objects are shown
in orange;
● Timed objects – to turn on the display of temporarily appearing objects, if the button is depressed these objects
are always visible, if it is released, they are not visible until they become effective;
● Deleted – to turn on the highlighting of a deleted object.

Map Loading and Unloading for Editing

ATTENTION! In this mode, maps are loaded for editing only. In the editing mode, there is no tracking of map objects
with the “Danger” attribute. This is what the monitoring mode is intended for (see the next paragraph).

Open the Maps panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 253

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Maps panel which will open up, to switch to the Maps page.

Select checkboxes in the right hand column of the table next to those maps which should be loaded in the editing
mode. For maps selection you can also use the Select/Clear all checkbox.

Press the Load button.

You can use an alternative method of loading maps in the editing mode via the context right button menu:

254 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Map Loading and Unloading for Editing

Names of maps from the table on the Maps page (all the available maps are displayed) will move to the list of maps
available for editing.

Press the button in the top left corner of the panel. The drop-down list displays all the maps available for editing. The
button shows the name of the active map whose objects will be displayed in the table on the Find Object page (in
the drop-down list, the name of this map is highlighted).

Press the button to display the active map. The button in the top right corner will switch automatically to the
Editor position.
For the objects from the loaded maps to be displayed on the on the ECDIS task screen, press the button in the top
right corner of the panel.

From the drop-down list select the Editor option.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 255

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To unload maps from the editing mode, press the button in the top left corner of the panel.

In the right hand column, next to the name of the map which should be unloaded, press the button.

The map will be unloaded, and its name will move to the table of available maps on the Maps page.

256 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Map Loading and Unloading for Monitoring

Map Loading and Unloading for Monitoring

ATTENTION! In this mode, maps are loaded exclusively for tracking map objects with the “Danger” attribute and
targets in the assigned zones. Maps can be loaded/unloaded in/from the monitoring mode on the WS with the
Navigational MASTER status only.

Open the Maps panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Maps panel which will open up, to switch to the Maps page.

Select the checkboxes in the right hand column of the table next to those maps which should be loaded in the
monitoring mode. For maps selection you can also use the Select/Clear all checkbox.

NOTE: Maps containing objects with the “Danger” attribute are marked with the “!” symbol in the table’s first column
to the left of the map name.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 257

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Monitoring button.

You can use an alternative method of loading maps in the monitoring mode via the context right button menu:

The marked maps will be loaded in the monitoring mode. This means that when these maps objects with the
“Danger” attribute turn up within the safety frame, the Navigational hazard caution will be triggered off (see also
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section
Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts).
At the same time, names of maps from the table on the Maps page will move to the list of maps available for editing.

258 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Map Loading and Unloading for Monitoring

Press the button in the top left corner of the panel. In the drop-down list, maps loaded in the monitoring mode are
marked with the symbol to the left of the map name. Maps containing objects with the “Danger” attribute are
shown in red.
As maps are loaded in the monitoring mode, their display on the ECDIS task screen is turned on automatically. The
button in the top right corner of the panel switches to the Monitoring option.
Maps loaded in the monitoring mode are at the same time loaded in the editing mode as well. As this is done, it will
be only objects of the saved maps which will be monitored. I.e., while the editing process is running, no changes
made before the map saving are taken into account.

To unload a map from the monitoring mode, press on the sign to the left of the map name.

The map will be unloaded from the monitoring mode but will remain in the editing mode.

To unload a monitoring mode map from the editing mode, press the button in the right hand column next to the
name of the map which should be unloaded.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 259

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

As this is done, a relevant warning is provided:

Press the Yes button.

Editing Map Objects

ATTENTION! Symbol type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Load the map containing the object you are going to edit (see section Map Loading and Unloading for Editing or
section Map Loading and Unloading for Monitoring).
With several maps loaded simultaneously, for editing you can select any object out of those visible on the screen:
the necessary chart will automatically become active.

Editing Map Object Attributes

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel.

From the drop-down list select the Edit item.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object (in the case of text objects, the acquisition point
is the first character) and press the left trackball button.

260 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Editing Map Objects

The bottom part of the screen will display a window for editing map objects.

If necessary, edit the map object symbol, colour (“Object colour” attribute), the map object display time (“Temporary”
attribute), map object text (“Text” attribute), required information (“Object information” attribute), the “Danger to
navigation” attribute and the required depth value (“Object depth” attribute) (see section Creating and Saving Maps,
paragraph Creating and Plotting Map Objects, item Plotting Symbol Type Objects).
Press the Apply button in the editing window to confirm the changes you have made.
Attributes of the line, text, depth and shape type objects are edited in much the same way.
To resize line or shape type objects, select this object as described above and press the Resize button in editing
window.

The acquisition marker will appear on the first point of the selected line object.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 261

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the acquisition marker to select a point on the line which should be changed, and press the left trackball button.
The graphics cursor will appear.

Move the cursor to the required coordinates. Press the left trackball button. The graphics cursor will change its form
to acquisition marker. Repeat this operation for other map object boundaries until the necessary configuration is set.

Press the right trackball button, all changes will be accepted.

Edit all the necessary map objects.
To exit from the editing mode press the right trackball button.
To attach/detach files to/from the map object, see section Creating and Saving Maps, paragraph Creating and
Plotting Map Objects, item Assigning “Attached File” Attribute.

Editing Map Object Coordinates

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel.

From the drop-down list select the Shift item.

262 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Editing Map Objects

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object to be shifted (the first character of a text object or
a point in a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball button. Position the marker which will appear, in the new object coordinates within the
displayed Chart panel.

Press the left trackball button: the object will move to the specified coordinates.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the mode of editing of the map object coordinates.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 263

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Deleting Map Object

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel.

From the drop-down list select the Delete item.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the object to be deleted (the first character of a text object
or a point in a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball button: presentation of the object will be removed from the Chart panel.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the map object deleting mode.

264 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Editing Map Objects

Restoring Deleted Map Object

Switch to the Display Options page.

Press the Deleted button in the Display Options group. The screen will display all the previously deleted objects
shown in the grey colour.

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel.

From the drop-down list select the Restore item.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 265

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Position the acquisition marker which will appear, on the deleted object
(the first character of a text object or a corner point of a line or area type object).

Press the left trackball button: the “Deleted object” attribute is removed, and the object is highlighted in accordance
with the previously made settings.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the deleted map object restore mode.

Merging Maps
Open the Maps panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Maps panel which will open up, to switch to the Maps page.

266 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Merging Maps

Load the map you are going to merge (see section Map Loading and Unloading for Editing).

The merging of maps implies that a newly created map will contain map objects from all the merged maps:

ORIGINAL MAP “A” ORIGINAL MAP “B” MERGED MAP

Press the Edit objects button in the right-hand part of the panel.

From the drop-down list select the Merge item.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 267

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the window which will open up, select the checkboxes next to the maps which should be merged.
Press the Merge button.
If 2 maps are selected for merging, the Merge window which will open up will have the following form:

Select the name under which the merged map will be saved (under one of the source map names, or under a new
name).
If more than two maps are selected for merging, the Merge window which will open up has the following form:

Enter the new map name.

Press the OK button.

Deleting Maps
Open the Maps panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Maps panel which will open up, to switch to the Maps page.

268 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Deleting Maps

Select the checkboxes in the right hand column of the table next to the maps which should be deleted. For maps
selection you can also use the Select/Clear all checkbox.

Press the Delete button.

You can use an alternative map deleting method by using the context right button menu:

In the window which will appear, press the OK button to confirm the deleting of the maps:

The selected maps will be deleted.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 269

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Search for Map Objects

ATTENTION! Symbol type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Open the Maps panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Load the map containing the object you are going to search for and select this map as active (see section Map
Loading and Unloading for Editing).
Switch to the Find object page.
Select the required map object in the left-hand part of the page and press the left trackball button. Coordinates of the
selected object will be displayed in the right-hand part of the page.

270 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Maps • Map Handling in Network Configuration

A double click of the left trackball button on the selected object line or its coordinates displays this object in the
centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10 seconds.

With the selection of line or area type objects, the right-hand part of the page displays coordinates of all the points
which the line/area type object consists of.

A double click of the left trackball button on the coordinates of any point which the line/area type object consists of,
displays this point in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle for 10 seconds.

Map Handling in Network Configuration

In the case of network configuration, map handing varies on stations with different navigation status.
Maps can be loaded in the editing mode independently on different WS’s with both, the MASTER and SLAVE status.
Maps are not synchronized with other WS’s until you save them on your WS by using the Save button. After the
synchronizing, saving is done resulting in that identical maps will be stored in all the WS’s included in the network. If
at the saving moment some of the WS’s were turned off or disconnected from the network, synchronizing will occur
as they are turned on or join the network.
If a map with one and the same name is edited simultaneously on different WS’s (e.g., on WS1, WS2 and WS4),
after the Save button is pressed on any of these WS’s (e.g., WS1), the map will be saved on this WS and on all the
WS’s of the network on which no its editing was done (e.g., all the WS’s except WS 2 and WS4).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 271

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

After an attempt to save maps on the WS’s on which the map was edited (e.g., WS 2 or WS4), the following warning
will be displayed:

If the Ignore button is pressed, all the changes made on this WS (e.g., WS2) will be ignored, and the map will be
synchronized with the rest of WS’s (e.g., except for WS4).
When the Save button is pressed, the map is saved on the WS (e.g., WS2) with all the changes and is synchronized
with the rest of WS’s (e.g., except for WS 4).

NOTE: If a map is saved under another name, it is synchronized immediately on all the WS’s.

Such algorithm is in action until the chart is saved on the rest of WS’s (e.g., WS 4) where it was edited.

ATTENTION! Maps can be loaded (unloaded) in the monitoring mode on the WS’s with the MASTER status only.

If an attempt is made to unload such map from the editing mode on a WS with the SLAVE status, the following
warning will be provided:

And you will only be able to carry out such operation on the WS with the MASTER status.

272 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes •

Handling of Routes
This chapter describes the procedure used in the handling of routes and schedules.

Work with Route 274

Default Route Settings 274
Creating Route 275
Route Loading and Unloading 282
Fast Route Search 283
Anchoring Operations 284
Editing Route 291
Deleting Route 300
Checking and Editing Route Taking into Account Dangers to Navigation 300
Protecting Route from Editing 305
Work with Schedule 306
Drawing Schedule 306
Editing a Schedule 310
Deleting Schedule 311
Voyage Plan Creation 311
Data Collection 311
Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon on Route 313
Voyage Plan Data Editing 314
Voyage Plan Print Preview and Printing 318
Exporting Voyage Plan 320

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 273

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Work with Route

Default Route Settings
Open e Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch tothe Route Settings page.

This page is intended for setting the default values of route elements. Set the following values which will be used
during the route plotting on the Route Planning panel:
● Safety Contour - safety contour value for the route legs;
● Safety Depth - safety depth value for the route legs;
● XTD - cross track distance values (simultaneously for the port and starboard sides) for the route legs;
● Turn radius - turn radius value for a WPT.

These values for route elements can subsequently be changed in the course of route editing on the Route Planning
panel (see below the Entering Additional Data item).
In the Anchor group, use the Cable Length and Safety Margin input fields to set the default values for respective
parameters that will be used for the anchoring operations (see below the Anchoring Operations paragraph).
The Snap to objects checkbox in the Ref. Points group is selected by default, in this case the reference point will
be referenced to the object automatically if it is not farther than 0.2 mile from it.

274 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Creating Route
Open the Route Planning panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the
ECDIS task screen.

Selecting Cursor Form

Switch to the Edit Options page.

The graphics cursor is used during the operation of some functions and represents an intersection of lines
corresponding to the latitude and longitude of the given point, but the form of the graphics cursor can be changed as
required.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 275

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

By default, the Standard cursor mode is set. To turn on additional graphics cursor tools, press the appropriate
buttons of the Advanced Cursors group:

● To display the line (Heading Mark) ahead of the cursor position in the direction of the plotted route leg;

● To display a line opposite to the Heading Mark from a waypoint;

● To display two additional lines setting their angles relative to the Heading Mark
line;

● To display range marks on the cursor lines in the form of notches or concentric
circles, set the distance between them in the box to the right.

NOTE: For the notches to be displayed, at least one advanced cursor display button should be enabled

(i.e., ). This is not required for the display of circles.

● To plot waypoints taking into account the WOL and F-DIST;

● To plot waypoints taking into account the lighthouse visibility range which is set in the box to
the right.

The advanced capabilities of the graphics cursor prove to be useful in, e.g., planning a route along the lead lines.

276 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Plotting Route
Press the New button in the top left part of the panel to display a blank table for the generation of a new route.

The graphics cursor will appear on the Chart Panel, whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the Place
First Point information window.

Set the cursor in the start point coordinates by moving the trackball, using the data in the Place First Point window,
and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 277

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The symbol of the start point with its number (“0”) will appear on the Chart Panel. Position the cursor in the coordinates
of the next point. At this stage, a route leg line will be drawn between the cursor and the start point. Press the left
trackball button: the Chart Panel will display the next point symbol with “1” for number and the plotted route leg. By
default, XTD lines are also shown. To turn off their display, use the Display button (see below).

If it is necessary to set several waypoints, repeat the trackball moving and left button pressing operation as many
times as there are WPT’s required to be set.
If the cursor is positioned beyond the Chart Panel boundaries, it will be re-drawn automatically so that there is
always a chart from the chart folio under the cursor.

278 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

After the setting of the last point of the planned route, double click the right trackball button: the cursor will exit from
the route planning and editing mode and will assume the form of the free cursor.

The generation of the route is completed.

Entering Additional Data

The display of the table is turned on/off by using the Show tables button.

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

The Waypoints table includes the following data (by columns):

● WPT – WPT number;
● Name – WPT name;
● Position – WPT latitude and longitude coordinate;
● Leg Type – route leg type (RL or GC) from the previous to the current WPT set by the operator; all route leg
calculations are referenced to the WGS-84 reference datum;
● Leg – course and distance from the previous to the current WPT;
● Total Distance – summary distance between the initial (0) and current WPT by the route legs;
● X PORT/X STBD – safe zone to the left and to the right of the route leg;
● Turn Radius– operator-set radius of the arc for the display of an approximate ship track on the turn.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 279

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

For input of the additional data, perform the procedures detailed below:

● position the cursor on the Name element cell; double click the left trackball button
to activate the cell;

● enter the WPT name; press <ENTER>;

● position the cursor on the Leg Type element cell; double click the left trackball button to activate the
cell;

● press the button in the right-hand part of the cell and select the sailing type from the list which will
open up;

● press the left trackball button to confirm the changes you have made;

● position the cursor on the X PORT/X STBD element cell; double click the left trackball button to
activate the cell;

● edit the XTD value to the left of the route leg; press the left trackball button;

● edit the XTD value to the right of the route leg; press the left trackball button;

● position the cursor on the Turn Radius element cell; double click the left trackball button to activate
the cell;

● enter the radius for the arc of the suitable ship track on the turning circle; press the left trackball
button.

When filling in the table, you can use the context menu called by the right trackball button:
● Clear cell – to delete a value in the selected cell;
● Fill cells down – to fill in all the cells below with a value entered in the selected cell;
● Fill cells up – to fill in all the cells above with a value entered in the selected cell.

280 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the Extra Data button to display the corresponding
table.

For input of the additional route data, perform the procedures detailed below:

● position the cursor on the Remarks element cell; double click the left trackball
button to activate the cell;

● enter the remark; press <Enter>;

● position the cursor on the Safety contour element cell; double click the left trackball button to
activate the cell;

● edit the safety contour value for the current route leg; press the left trackball button (by default, and
also for all the routes created in the earlier versions, the 30 m value is set);

● position the cursor on the Safety depth element cell; double click the left trackball button to activate
the cell;

● edit the safety depth value for the current route leg; press the left trackball button (by
default, and also for all the routes created in the earlier versions, the 30 m value is set).

When filling in the table, you can use the context menu called by the right trackball button:
● Clear cell – to delete a value in the selected cell;
● Fill cells down – to fill in all the cells below with a value entered in the selected cell;
● Fill cells up – to fill in all the cells above with a value entered in the selected cell.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 281

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Show button in the top part of the panel.

The following checkboxes in the drop-down list for turning on the display of route options on the ECDIS task screen
are selected by default:
● Waypoints names – to display on the electronic chart WPT names;
● Turns – to display on the electronic chart the turn radius arc for the active route;
● Cross track distances – to display on the electronic chart safety lines for the active route;
● Reference points – to display Reference points;
● Wheel over lines – to display on the electronic chart WOL marks;
● Remarks – to display remarks;
● Rises & Sets - to display sun and moon rise and set symbols;
● Anchor rings - to display anchor rings;
● CRS/DIST/SPD - to display course, distance and speed for each route leg.
If necessary, clear the Waypoints names checkbox to turn off the display of waypoints’ names on the ECDIS task
screen.
To save the route, enter its name in the name input field and press the Save button.

Route Loading and Unloading

In the top left part of the Route Planning panel, press the Load button.

282 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

In the list which will open up select the route required to be loaded in the editing mode, and press the left trackball
button.

Several routes can be loaded simultaneously in the editing mode. As a button with route name is pressed, the route
becomes active and can be edited on the screen by using the graphic editor.

To quick load the necessary route in the monitoring mode, select it from the routes loaded in the editing mode and
press the Monitoring button (see also Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). User Manual
document, Chapter 4, Loading of Route and Schedule in the Navigation Mode section and section What is Different
in Route Monitoring in the Route Planning of this document):

To unload the route, press the button to the right of the route name.

Fast Route Search

Load the necessary route (see item Route Loading and Unloading).
In the top part of the Route Planning panel, press the Focus button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 283

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Chart Panel will display the entire route on the suitable scale chart.

Anchoring Operations
Anchorage Planning in Route Plotting
Plot the route by using one of the procedures described above, or load the plotted route (see paragraph Creating a
Route).
Open the Route Planning panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the
ECDIS task screen.

284 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Use the tab in the top part of the Route Planning panel which will open up, to switch to the Anchor page.

During the route planning it is possible to set safe anchorage parameters in a selected WP. To this end, the own ship
length (Ship Length) specified in the System Configuration utility is used (see document Multifunctional Display.
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD
Settings) along with the following parameters:
● Drop Radius – the “inner” circle radius within which the anchor may turn up during the dropping. The zero setting
assumes that the anchor will get exactly in the WP position;
● Cable Length - anchor cable length, cannot be smaller than the Depth value;
● Safety Margin – additional range to ensure safe anchorage, can be set to zero;
● Depth – estimated depth value in the anchoring position;
● Swing Radius – radius of the “outer” circle calculated from the following formula:

Use the Anchor group to set the necessary values for the parameters listed above. For the Cable Length you can
use both, metres and shackles (the length of one shackle is equal to 27.5 m).
Press the Select waypoint button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 285

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

An acquisition marker will appear in the Chart Panel whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the
Select waypoint information window.

The Select waypoint window displays the marker coordinates.

Position the acquisition marker on the anchoring WPT:

Press the left trackball button.

The ECDIS task screen will display the Drop Circle (a solid-line circle if set) and the Swing Circle (dashed circle).

NOTE: To this end, it is necessary to select the Anchor rings checkbox in the Show drop-down list (see section
Work with Route, paragraph Creating a Route, item Entering Additional Data).

286 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

The settings made for the WP in question will be entered in the route, its status will be changed to edited, and the “*”
symbol will be added to its name.

After the end of editing, the route should be saved.

NOTE: If some parameters have already been set for the selected WP, they will be automatically restored in the
Anchor group. After changing, save them by pressing the Save button which will be enabled.

At the same time, the Chart Objects display will open up in the Control Panel:

The display shows all the dangers which happen to be within the anchorage zone (Swing Circle).
The following chart objects should be considered as dangerous during the anchorage:
● Obstructions, Wrecks, Underwater rocks, Isolated dangers, Nav Aids;
● Depth contours smaller than the ship’s Safety Contour;
● All objects with the “Anchorage Restricted” and “Anchorage Prohibited” attributes;
● New objects (NEWOBJ) containing dangerous object references.
Click on the dangerous object name: it will be highlighted in orange on the ECDIS task screen:

To remove the highlighting from all the dangerous objects, press the Unmark all Objects button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 287

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

For the user convenience sake, the graphic route plotting mode implements the display of a Drop Circle and Swing
Circle on the ECDIS task screen. To this end, select the Show anchor rings checkbox in the Anchor group:

Switch to the route graphic editor mode (see section Work with Route, paragraph Editing the Route, item Graphic
Route Editing Method).

During the route plotting, the Drop Circle and Swing Circle will be shown on the ECDIS task screen in the form of
solid-line circles.

Anchoring in Route Monitoring Mode

In the route monitoring mode, the route leg has 10 cable marks to the anchoring point. The Drop Circle (a solid-line
circle) and the Swing Circle (a dashed-line circle) are shown in red, just as the monitored route.

288 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Open the Monitoring panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Navigational Alerts page.

In the Safety Swing Circle group select the data source. If data is taken from the monitored route, select the Use
from route radio button. If the user wishes to set new anchorage parameters (or if the data was not set before)
select the Calculate radio button and set the necessary data (see also paragraph Anchorage Planning in Route
Plotting).
Press the Use for Anchor 1 (2) button, the calculated value for the Swing Radius will be entered in the Safety ring
column of the Anchor watch settings table.

Select the checkboxes in the Alert column to turn on the alert generation as the ship sails beyond the set distances.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 289

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Select the Show anchor watch rings checkbox to show the anchor watch rings around the anchor position after the
anchor drop points are set.
To set the position of dropping anchor 1, press the Down button in row 1.

In this case, the anchor position will correspond to the position of anchor point 1 at the moment when the Down

button is pressed. The anchor position is marked with the special symbol specifying the anchor number.
At the same time the Chart Objects display will open up on the Control Panel:

The display shows all the dangers which happen to be within the anchorage zone (Swing Circle).
At this time it is advisable to unload the monitored route for decluttering the ECDIS task screen.

290 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Along the line connecting the positions of the anchor and anchor point 1, bearing and distance between them is
dynamically displayed.

To set the anchor position, use the cursor to press the By Cursor button in row 1. Indicate the anchor position with
the cursor on the Chart Panel.

Press the left trackball button. Use similar procedures if it is necessary to set the position of dropping anchor 2.

Editing Route
Graphic Route Editing Method
Load the necessary route (see Route Loading and Unloading item).
In the top part of the Route Planning panel, press the WP Editor button.

An acquisition marker will appear in the Chart Panel whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the Edit
route information window.

The Edit route window displays the marker coordinates.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 291

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

1. Changing coordinates of an existing WPT:

Position the acquisition marker on the WPT to be edited.

Press the left trackball button: the marker will acquire the WPT and change its own form.

Move the acquired WPT to the required place. As the WPT coordinates change, the adjacent route legs will
change, too.
Press the left trackball button.

The WPT will be set in the new coordinates.

292 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

2. Setting a New WPT:

Position the acquisition marker on the route leg where a new WPT is required to be set.

Press the left trackball button: a new WPT will be set. The marker will acquire the new WPT and change its own
form.

Move the acquired WPT to the necessary place.

As the WPT coordinates change, the adjacent route legs will change, too.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 293

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the left trackball button. The new WPT will be set in the specified coordinates.

3. Deleting a WPT:
Position the acquisition marker on the WPT to be deleted.

Press the left trackball button: the marker will acquire the WPT and change its own form.

Press the right trackball button.

294 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

The point will be deleted, and the adjacent route legs will be combined to form one.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The marker will assume the form of the free cursor.
Save the route as required (see Creating a Route paragraph).

Tabular Route Editing Method

Load the necessary route (see Route Loading and Unloading item).

The display of the table is turned on/off by using the Show tables button.

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 295

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Edit the existing route by using the following procedures.

1. Edit coordinates and route elements for an existing WPT as described in item Creating a Route.
2. Setting a New WPT:
Position the cursor on the cell with the number of the WPT before which a new WPT is required to be added,
press the left trackball button. This WPT line will be highlighted in colour.

Press the <INSERT> key of the computer keyboard, or press the right trackball button and select the Insert
waypoint context menu item. A new line containing the same number and coordinates corresponding to the
middle
of the leg, which it is set on, will appear. The old line will be assigned with the next number.

Edit the route element value.

3. Deleting a WPT:
Position the cursor on the cell with the number of the WPT required to be deleted, press the left trackball button.
This WPT line will be highlighted in colour.

Press <Delete> key on the computer keyboard, or press the right trackball button and select the Delete
waypoints context menu item.

Press Yes to confirm the WPT deleting.

296 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

The selected line will be deleted, those following it will be re-numbered.

All the changes in the table will be reflected accordingly on the graphic screen.
Save the route as required by pressing the Save button in the top right part of the panel.

Shifting Route
Load the necessary route (see Route Loading and Unloading item).
Switch to the Edit Options page. Press the Shift button in the Operations group.

An acquisition marker will appear in the Chart Panel whereas the right bottom part of the screen will display the Edit
Route information window.

The Edit route window displays the marker coordinates.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 297

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Position the acquisition marker on any point of the route which should be moved.

Press the left trackball button: the marker will change its own form.

Move the route to the required place.

The shift bearing and distance will be displayed in the Shift Route information window in the right bottom part of the
screen.

298 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Press the left trackball button.

The route will be shifted.

NOTE: All the WPT’s of the selected route will be shifted by the selected distance and bearing.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The marker will assume the shape of the free cursor.
Save the route as required (see Creating a Route item).

Creating Reversed Route

Load the necessary route (see Route Loading and Unloading item).
Switch to the Edit Options page. Press the Reverse button in the Operations group.

A route will be created with the WPT order inverse to that in the active route.
All the changes in the table will be shown accordingly on the Chart Panel.
Save the route as required (see Creating a Route item).

Merging Routes
Load the necessary route (see Route Loading and Unloading item).
Switch to the Edit Options page. Press the Link button in the Operations group.

In the list which will open up, select the route which will be connected to the last point of the loaded route. Press the
left trackball button.
WPT’s of the connected route will be added to the table of route elements.
All the changes in the table will be shown accordingly on the Chart Panel.
Save the route as required (see Creating a Route item).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 299

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Deleting Route
Switch to the Edit Options page. Press the Delete button in the Operations group.

Select the route which should be deleted from the list and press the left trackball button.

In the window which will appear, press Yes to confirm the deleting. The route will be deleted.

ATTENTION! The route cannot be deleted until it is loaded into monitoring or editing mode.

Checking and Editing Route Taking into Account

Dangers to Navigation
Load the route which should be checked for the availability of dangers to navigation (see Route Loading and
Unloading item).
Switch to the Check route page.

In the Safety options group select which charts should be used for the check:only charts with the Best scale or all
the charts (All scales) under the checked route (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v.
3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section Main Alerts Generation Principles, paragraph Safety Alerts).

Press the button in the Check route group: the route will be checked.

300 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

The list of chart objects and safety contour values used in the route check are displayed in the Safety options
group.

The check process is shown in the display window.

Press the button if it is necessary to interrupt manually the check of the entire active route for the availability of
dangers to navigation.

The route check will be interrupted. It can be resumed after the necessary time without exiting from the route

checking mode. To do this, press the button.

Select the necessary option, the route check will be resumed.

After the end of check, the Check route group will display a message about detected dangers or about no dangers
having been found.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 301

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

To view the detected dangers to navigation, use the and buttons to select the danger you are interested

in. Press the button. The danger to navigation will be indicated by highlighting on the Chart Panel. In this case
the best chart on the original scale will be loaded.

To edit the route to take into account the detected dangers to navigation, use the and buttons to select
the required danger and press the WPT Editor button.
An acquisition marker will appear on the Chart panel in the point with coordinates of the detected danger to
navigation.

302 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Edit the route leg according to the editing rules so that the route leg does not pass through the dangerous place. E.g.,
change the WPT position.

After the route leg editing is completed, press the left trackball button. After the change of the WPT position, two
legs before the changed point and two legs after it will be automatically checked.

Perform the editing until the end of the route (see also section Route Editor, paragraph Graphic Route Editing Method).
If there are no dangers to navigation on the route, the Check route group will display an appropriate message.

To accept the route checking results and exit from the checking mode press the button . The ”checked”
attribute will be assigned to the route. Check results will be entered in the voyage plan, the following window will
open up.

To view check results, press the Yes button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 303

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Voyage Plan table on the Safety Parameters page specifies safety parameters which were used for checking
each route leg. The List of Accepted Alerts column lists dangers which were found during the route check but were
ignored by the user. If no dangers were found on these legs, cells of the List of Accepted Alerts column will be
empty. Specified in the brackets are charts on which dangers were detected, as well as danger depths for the safety
contour and safety depth. The Voyage Plan footer displays: Check for safety: 07.10.12 13:25 (date and time of
the check).
To save check results, export the voyage plan in one of the formats (*.pdf, *.html, *.xls) by pressing the respective
button in the left top corner (PDF, HTML, Excel) of the Print Preview window.

ATTENTION! As the route is unloaded, data in the List of Accepted Alerts column is not saved.

The saved files have the Route_name_(DD.MM.YY,HH-MM_checked).* format specifying the status (checked),
check time and date.

To exit from the checking mode without accepting the route check results, press the button.
For checking route geometry for compliance with the Track Control Mode, press the Track control mode radio
button.

For the reference purpose, the Track control group specifies limitations for the route elements required for the Track
Control mode operation.

Use the same procedure to check the route as described above for safety parameters.

304 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Route

Protecting Route from Editing

Plot the route by using one of the procedures described above, or load the plotted route (see Creating a Route
paragraph).
Use the tab in the top part of the Route Planning panel which will open up, to switch to the Protection control
page.

Press the Protect button in the Protection control group.

If NS 4100 logon had a low access level which does not allow route protection (see document Navi-Sailor 4100
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Special Functions,chapter NS 4100 Security Access System, section Levels/Passwords
Page, paragraph Assigning Access Levels), a special warning will appear:

Press the OK button, a request to enter a password will appear:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 305

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Enter the password for the appropriate access level. Press the OK button. The route will be protected from editing,
and the letter “[P]” will be added to its name.

The protected route can neither be saved under the previous name, nor deleted. If saved under an altered name, the
route loses its “Protected” status.
In the list of routes, the protected route is marked off with bold type:

Work with Schedule

Drawing Schedule
Load the route for which the schedule will be drawn (see paragraph Work with Route, item Route Loading and
Unloading ).

The display of the table is turned on/off by using the Show tables button.

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

306 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Schedule

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

To draw a new schedule, switch to the the Schedule calculation page.

Press the Create Schedule button in the Schedule group.

Enter schedule elements for WPT’s in the table. To do this, perform the procedures detailed below:

● position the cursor on the ETA element cell (not set for the route start point). Double click the left
trackball button to activate the cell;

● enter the ETA for this WPT and press the right trackball button;

● press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made;

● position the cursor on the Stay element cell; double click the left trackball button to activate the
cell;

● enter the time of stay at this WPT and press the right trackball button;

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 307

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

● press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made;

● position the cursor on the Time zone element cell; double click the left trackball button to
activate the cell;

● enter the time zone at this WPT and press the right trackball button;

● press Appl” button to confirm the changes you have made;

● position the cursor on the ETD element cell (not set for the route end point); double click the left
trackball button to activate the cell;

● enter the ETD for the WPT and press the right trackball button;

● press the Apply button to confirm the changes you have made;

● position the cursor on the Speed element cell; double click the left trackball button to activate
the cell;

● enter the speed value on the route leg; press the left trackball button.

NOTE: There is no editing of TTG and Total Time cells.

When filling in the table you can use the context menu called by the right trackball button:
● Clear cell – to delete a value in the selected cell;
● Fill cells down – to fill in all the cells below with a value entered in the selected cell;
● Fill cells up – to fill in all the cells above with a value entered in the selected cell.

ATTENTION! For the route start point, the ETD value should always be specified. For the end point, it is necessary
to specify ETA or speed of proceeding along the route legs.

308 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Work with Schedule

Press the button in the Schedule Calculation group: the schedule will be calculated.

The schedule calculation process is reflected in the display window. In the table, empty cells will be filled in with the
calculated schedule elements.

A schedule has been created. To save the schedule, enter its name in the name input field of the Schedule group.

Press <ENTER>.
You can simultaneously create several schedules with different data for one and the same route. As a button with
schedule name is pressed, the schedule becomes active and can be edited in the schedule Table. The active
schedule can be selected in the line of the Schedule group:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 309

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Editing a Schedule
Load the route for which the schedule will be drawn for (see paragraph Work with Route,item Route Loading and
Unloading).

The display of the table is turned on/off by using the Show tables button.

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

Switch to the Schedule calculation page.

In the Schedules group, press the button with the name of the schedule which should be edited.

To edit schedule elements, perform procedures detailed in the previous section.

ATTENTION! For the route start point, ETD value should always be specified. For the end point,
it is necessary to specify ETA or speed of proceeding along the route legs.

To clear schedule table, press the Clear Schedule button.

Create the schedule anew and save it as detailed in the previous section.

310 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Voyage Plan Creation

Deleting Schedule
Load the route for which the schedule will be deleted (see paragraph Work with Route,item Route Loading and
Unloading).
Press the Delete Schedule button in the Schedule group.

Select the schedule which should be deleted from the list, and press the left trackball button. In the window, which
will appear, confirm the deleting.

The schedule will be deleted.

Voyage Plan Creation

There is a capability to create a voyage plan automatically using the chart extractions, UKC calculation, tides,
currents and the collection of charts crossed by the route.
Load the route for which the schedule will be drawn (see paragraph Work with Route, item Route Loading and
Unloading).

Data Collection
The display of the table is turned on/off by using the Show tables button.

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 311

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

For input of the draught, perform the procedures detailed below:

● position the cursor on the Draught element cell; double click the left trackball button to activate the
cell;

● enter the draught value on the route leg; press the left trackball button;

To perform the automatic data collection, switch to the Voyage plan page.

In the Data Collection group, select checkboxes of those data categories which should be included in the Voyage
Plan.

Press the button in the Data Collection group: the selected data will be collected.

If it is necessary to interrupt the data collection manually, press the button.

After the data collection, the voyage plan data will be available in the Extra data table.

312 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Voyage Plan Creation

Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon on Route

For this functionality to operate it is necessary that a schedule be drawn for the route and that during the voyage plan
creating the Rises&Sets checkbox be selected (see the previous paragraph).
After the voyage plan has been created, the Chart panel will show the route with the sunrise/sunset and
moonrise/moonset symbols.

NOTE:To this end, it is necessary to turn on the display of these symbols in the Show drop-down list in the top part
of the Route Planning panel (see section Work with Route, paragraph Creating a Route, item Entering Additional
Data).

Position the free View cursor on the necessary symbol; the cursor will change its form. Press the left trackball
button: the data card will display the calculated data: sunrise/sunset and moonrise/moonset, coordinates, date of
passing this point on the route.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 313

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Voyage Plan Data Editing

The display of the table is turned on/off by using the Show tables button.

In the left part of the Route Planning panel, press the button to display the corresponding table.

The Extra data table contains the following data (columns) on reference points:
● Ref. point – reference point name taken from the chart object (if the object has no name, the cell is empty);
● BRG/Dist – bearing and distance to the reference point.

Reference points are set automatically during the data collection, if the Ref. Points checkbox is selected in the Data
Collection group of the Voyage plan page (see the previous item).

Setting and Changing Reference Points

To set or change a reference point, position the cursor on the necessary WPT in the Extra data table and click the
left trackball button on the required point.

To set reference points on the Chart Panel, press the Ref.Points button in the top part of the Route Planning panel.

314 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Voyage Plan Creation

An acquisition marker will appear on the Chart Panel at the selected WPT.

The right-hand part of the screen will display the Select waypoint information window showing the acquisition
marker coordinates and bearing/distance relative to the WPT WOL.

Press the left trackball button: the marker will acquire the WPT and change its own form to the graphics cursor.
Position the marker in the new reference point within the displayed Chart Panel. If the Snap to object checkbox is
selected in the Route Settings page of the Config panel (see section Work with Route, paragraph Default Route
Settings), the reference point will be referenced to the object automatically (if it is not farther than 0.2 mile from
graphics cursor).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 315

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Select waypoint information window shows the acquisition marker coordinates and bearing/distance relative to
the WPT WOL.

Press the left trackball button.

The reference point will be shown on the Chart Panel in the form of two blue circles. The blue dashed line connects
the WPT WOL and its corresponding reference point.
The values of bearing/distance to the reference point from the WPT WOL are shown over the line.
The same values are displayed in the table’s BRG/Dist column.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The marker will assume the shape of the free cursor.

316 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Voyage Plan Creation

Deleting Reference Points

To delete a reference point, position the cursor on the necessary WPT in the Extra data table and press the left
trackball button.

To set reference points on the Chart Panel, press the Ref.pts. button in the top part of the Route Planning panel.

An acquisition marker will appear on the Chart Panel at the selected WPT.

Press the left trackball button: the marker will acquire the WPT and change its own form. Press the right trackball
button: the reference point has been deleted.

Press the right trackball button to exit from the editing mode. The marker will assume the shape of the free cursor.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 317

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Search for Reference Point

To view a reference point on the Chart Panel, position the cursor on the necessary WPT in the Extra data table and
press the left trackball button.

The reference point is displayed in the centre of the Chart Panel:

Voyage Plan Print Preview and Printing

Load the route which should be printed (see paragraph Work with Route, item Route Loading and Unloading).
Create a Voyage plan (see Voyage Plan Creation paragraph).
Switch to the Voyage plan page.

Press the Preview button in the Print group.

318 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling of Routes • Voyage Plan Creation

The Print Preview window will display a printed version of the Voyage Plan.

For the preview of the Voyage Plan pages, use the following buttons:

ATTENTION! Check that the printer is connected to the computer on which the NS4000 is installed.

Press the Print button in the Print group.

The voyage plan will be printed out.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 319

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Exporting Voyage Plan

Load the route which should be converted to any of the formats listed below (see paragraph Work with Route, Route
Loading and Unloading item).
Switch to the Voyage plan page.

Press the appropriate button in the Export group.

The voyage plan will be exported.

Press OK.
Access to the file is by using the Data Tool utility, in the Route group of the Route export feature.

320 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units •

Handling Radar Information and Target

Designation Units
This chapter describes the procedure used in the handling of radar information and target designation units.

Radar Overlay 322

ARPA 325
Target Display 325
Turning On/Off External ARPA Tools 327
ARPA Settings 328
AIS 334
Handling AIS Targets 334
Setting of Voyage Data 337
Transmission of Messages in AIS System 340
Reception of Messages in AIS System 343
Using AIS Safety Messages Database 346
Handling Targets 347
Setting of Safety Parameters in Tracking of Targets 347
Handling Target Table 348
Prompt Target Search 349
Turning On Mode of Associating AIS and ARPA Targets 351
Turning On DR Mode for AIS Targets 352
Filtering Lost Targets 354
Filtering AIS Targets 355
Obtaining Information on Target 357

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 321

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Radar Overlay
To select a scanner, press the scanner selection button arrow in the Sensors window of the Control panel.

Select the necessary scanner (the button name corresponds to the selected scanner).
To turn on the radar picture, press the Overlay button.

A radar picture will appear on the Chart panel.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

322 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Radar Overlay

In the list which will open up, select the Radar Settings line and press the left trackball button.

In the Radar Settings display which will open up, set the range scale. To do this, use the buttons to the right of the
Range input box.

Turn on the display of range rings as required. To do this, press the Show button to the right of the Rings box.

Set the required brightness, gain, suppression of rain and sea clutter by using the buttons on the sides of level
indicators.

To enter the required transparency value, use the buttons (from 0 – opaque to 3 – almost transparent) in the
Transparency group.

To set the required rectangular area of the radar picture display, press the Set button in the Overlay window group.

A graphics cursor will appear in the chart screen area. Position the cursor in the initial point of the area and press the
left trackball button. Set the required radar picture area by moving the cursor, keeping the left trackball button
depressed.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 323

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the trackball button again. The area will be set.

Turn on and adjust the scan-to-scan correlation function as required. To do this, press the button in the
Accumulation group.

In the list which will open up, select the necessary value (from 20 to 100) or None to switch the function off. Press
the left trackball button to confirm selection.
Press the required colour button in the Echo colour button group to set the colour of the radar picture.

Select the Auto adjust range by scale checkbox if it is necessary to automatically switch the scanner scale with a
switch of the ECDIS task screen scale.

The adjustment of the radar picture is completed.

RADAR MASTER X-1 - status of selected radar picture source (see above) on this WS (see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 10, section Network
Configuration, paragraph Interswitch).

324 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • ARPA

ARPA
Target Display
There are three ways to turn on/off the display of ARPA targets on the ECDIS task screen:
1. Open the Targets panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Targets panel which will open up, to switch to the Target Table page:

In the Show Target group, press the following buttons:

● ARPA A(B) – to turn on the display of ARPA A(B) targets. Connection is made in the System Configuration
utility (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide,
Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings);
● Own – to turn on the display of ARPA targets processes by the ARPA built into the program.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 325

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

2. In the Sensors window of the Control panel select the necessary source of ARPA targets and press the ARPA
button. From the drop-down list select the necessary ARPA source.

3. Press the <TARGET> key on the ES6 keyboard (the display of all the ARPA targets from all the available sources
is turned on).
If there are some ARPA tracked targets, they will appear on the Chart panel, whereas their motion parameters will be
shown in the target table.

Turn on, as required, the display of target tracks. To do this, press the Tracks button in the Show Target group.

Target tracks will be displayed on the Chart panel.

326 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • ARPA

Turning On/Off External ARPA Tools

ATTENTION! The tools are not available unless the external ARPA-A is connected and provides relevant
sentences.

Open the Targets panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Targets panel which will open up, to switch to the Target Table page:

In the Show Target group of the Targets panel which will open up, press the ARPA A button.
To turn on the display of tools on the Chart panel, press the Cursors and/or ERBL buttons in the Show Target
group.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 327

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

ARPA Settings
To turn on the display of targets, press the Overlay and the ARPA buttons in the Sensors window of the Control
panel.

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Targets line and press the left trackball button.

To Acquire Targets for Tracking

To switch the cursor to the target acquisition mode, press the Acquire button in the Targets group.

328 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • ARPA

Position the cursor on the target and press the left trackball button.

In a minute, the acquired target will be displayed as a green coloured circle with pre-calculated motion vector.

The target has been acquired for tracking. If you press the right trackball button, the cursor exits from the target
acquisition mode.

To Cancel Tracked Targets

To switch the cursor to the target tracking cancelling mode, press the Cancel button in the Targets group.

Position the cursor on the tracked target and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 329

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The target tracking will be cancelled.

If you press the right trackball button, the cursor exits from the tracking cancelling mode.
To cancel tracking of all the previously acquired targets, press the Cancel All button in the Targets group.

To Turn on Ring Shaped Guard Zones

To set the Guard Zone manually, press the Guard Zone 1 or Guard Zone 2 buttons.

The ring shaped guard zone will be displayed on the ECDIS task screen. Targets getting within the guard zone will
be displayed in the form of flickering circles.

At the same time, the GZ Tgt ID warning will be triggered off. Acknowledge this warning. After the processing,
targets will be displayed in the form of yellow coloured circles with pre-calculated motion vectors.

330 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • ARPA

To Set Guard Zone Limits

To set guard zone limits, position the free cursor on the left-hand boundary of the guard zone. As this is done, the

cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball button. The cursor will assume the form of a graphics cursor.

Move the ring shaped zone along the circle relative to the own ship symbol in the required direction.

Press the left trackball button to set the new position of the zone and to exit from the graphics cursor mode.
Position the free cursor on the right-hand boundary of the guard zone.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 331

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball button. The cursor will assume the form of a graphics cursor.

Move the right-hand limit of the ring shaped zone setting the necessary coverage angle.

Press the left trackball button to set the new position of the zone and to exit from the graphics cursor mode.
Position the free cursor on one of the arcs delimiting the guard zone.

332 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • ARPA

As this is done, the cursor will assume the following form:

Press the left trackball button. The cursor will assume the form of a graphics cursor.

Move the zone limit to the required distance.

NOTE: If the zone’s closer limit crosses its farther limit in the process of zone shift, they exchange their places.

Press the left trackball button to set the new zone position and exit from the graphics cursor mode.

To Turn Off Guard Zones

To turn off a guard zone, release the appropriate button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 333

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

AIS
Handling AIS Targets

AIS Target Display

There are three ways to turn on/off the display of AIS targets on the ECDIS task screen:
1. Open the Targets panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS
task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Targets panel which will open up, to switch to the Target Table page:

In the Show Target group, press the AIS button.

2. Press the AIS button in the Sensors window of the Control panel.

3. Press the <TARGET> key on the ES6 keyboard.

334 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • AIS

AIS targets will appear in the Chart panel, and their motion parameters will be displayed in the Targets Table.

48 nm value is set in the Max. Range input box by default, that is the radius of an area within which the AIS targets
are processed and displayed.

Set the necessary radius (up to 100 NM) of the AIS targets processing area.

Display of AIS Target Identifiers

Press the AIS Target identification button to select the AIS targets identifier.

In the list which will open up, select the necessary identifier or None to declutter the Chart panel. Press the left
trackball button. Targets will be displayed on the Chart panel with the selected identifier, and its name will be shown
on the button.
Position the cursor on the target identifier in the Targets Table.

The hint will display the name of the AIS object if it is contained in the messages transmitted by the AIS object.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 335

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Enter as required the “Alias” identifier (up to 8 characters) for an AIS object in the Alias row of the Targets Table.

On the Chart panel, the target will be displayed with the entered “Alias” identifier regardless of settings made in the
AIS Target identification group. This identifier is displayed on the Chart panel only and is not transmitted in
messages.

Display of Target Tracks

Turn on, as required, the display of target tracks. To do this, press the Tracks button in the Show Target group.

Target tracks will be displayed on the Chart panel.

336 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • AIS

Prompt Target Search

Press the button with the target identifier in the Name line of the Targets Table, e.g., 316001696.

The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle.

Setting of Voyage Data

ATTENTION! Setting of voyage data is available only on the station with the MASTER status .

Open the AIS panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 337

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top left part of the AIS panel to switch to the Voyage and Static Data page. Press the Edit
button.

If the AIS class B is selected during the installation (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS
(v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings) the AIS panel
looks like follows:

NOTE: In this case, the set of possible settings is limited.

In the left-hand part of the Voyage and Static Data page, press the Navigational status button.

In the list which will open up, select the own ship navigation status and press the left trackball button.

338 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • AIS

Press the Type of ship button in the left-hand part of the page.

In the list which will open up, select the own ship type and press the left trackball button.
Press the Cargo button in the left-hand part of the page (for ships carrying cargoes only).

In the list which will open up, select the dangerous cargo category as required and press the left trackball button.
Use the Mean draught input line to enter the own ship mean draught value and press the left trackball button.

Use the Destination input line to enter the own ship port of destination (not more than 20 symbols) and press the left
trackball button.

Use the ETA line to enter the ETA (UTC) in the port of destination specified in the Destination line, and press the
<ENTER> key. If the system (UTC) time value is larger than the entered ETA value, “Undefined” will be automatically
set in the ETA input line.

In the Persons on board input line, enter the number of persons on board and press the left trackball button.

Press the Apply button.

ATTENTION! Static Data group always displays own ship data which is set on the Ship settings page of the INS
panel in the System Configuration utility and cannot be changed in the ECDIS task. Where the transponder settings
do not match those in the ECDIS task, the own ship name and Call Sign are shown in orange.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 339

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

As other devices are connected to the AIS transponder in addition to the MFD (e.g., MKD or pilot software), the own
ship name and call sign in the transponder can be changed by these users. The operator is notified about these
changes by the Check AIS Ship Name and Check AIS Call Sign cautions which will remain active until the own
ship data is restored in the transponder. To restore the own ship data settings in the transponder as per the settings
in the System Configuration utility, press the Restore button.
The setting of own ship parameters transmitted in the AIS system is completed.

Transmission of Messages in AIS System

Turn on the display of AIS targets (see paragraph Handling AIS Targets).
Open the AIS panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the left-hand part of the AIS panel to switch to the Messaging page.

To prepare and transmit a text message, press the Create Message button on the Messaging page in the Send
message group and select Safety Text.

340 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • AIS

NOTE: If the class B AIS is selected during the installation, the capability to send messages with the "Safety Text"
and/or "Normal Text" status is set in the System Configuration utility. (see Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000
ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings).

Press the left trackball button.

The Send Message window will open up, specifying the type of the selected message.

Set the identifier of the addressee of the message to be sent. To transmit a message to all the ships in the radio
coverage area, select the To All checkbox.

To transmit a message to a certain ship, use one of the three procedures:

1. Select the To target with MMSI checkbox and enter the MMSI of the addressee in the input line which will be
activated.

2. Select the To target with MMSI checkbox and press the button to the right of the input line.
Position the acquisition marker, which will appear on the Chart panel, on the target, which is the addressee of the
message.

Press the left trackball button. The input line will display the MMSI of the specified target.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 341

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

3. To send a reply message, press the Reply button in the Receive Message group.

With the use of the Reply function, the Send message window opens up for a message, which has the same
type as the message received from an AIS object, “Safety Text” in this case. The input line will automatically
display MMSI of the AIS object, which the message has been received from.

Use the text input window in the Send Message group to enter the text of the message which should be sent.

Press the Send button.

Select the message despatch channel (Auto is generally recommended). The compiled message will be sent.
Press the Close button.

342 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • AIS

Check the sent message status in the table in the Send message group. The message status may be one of the
following:
● Waiting – the message has been transmitted by the MFD, but no confirmation of its relay has been received from
the transponder;
● Sent – the message has been sent by the transponder, but no confirmation of its delivery to the addressee has
been received or confirmation is not expected if the message was sent to all the AIS objects (“All” identifier);
● Delivered – the message has been delivered to the addressee;
● Failed – the message, for some reasons, cannot be sent by the transponder.

The text of sent “Safety Text” messages, as well as their status (except “Waiting”) is recorded in the ship’s
electronic log book.

Reception of Messages in AIS System

ATTENTION! The default setting implies generation of the AIS message notification upon the receipt of messages
from AIS objects.

As the notification is accepted by the operator, the received messages is shown on the AIS Messages display of
the Control panel and in the Receive message group on the Messaging page of the AIS panel.
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 343

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the list which will open up, select the AIS Messages line and press the left trackball button.

In the AIS Messages display which will open up, read the received message. Use the buttons to view
the received messages.

ATTENTION! Control buttons in the AIS Messages display of the Control panel and in the Receive Message group
on the Messaging page of the AIS panel are synchronised.

Open the AIS panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

344 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • AIS

Use the tab in the left-hand part of the AIS panel to switch to the Messaging page.

In the Receive message group, read the received message. Use the buttons to view the received
messages.
The AIS message checkbox is selected by default, arrival of a message, therefore, triggers off the AIS Message
notification. Clear this checkbox to disable the notification generation upon the receipt of AIS messages.
The Show new message checkbox is selected by default; upon the receipt of a new message it will, therefore, be
shown in the AIS Messages display of the Control panel and in the Receive group on the Messaging page of the
AIS panel. Clear this the Show new message checkbox to save an image of the viewed message upon the receipt
of a new message.
Turn on the display of AIS targets (see paragraph Handling AIS Targets). AIS targets will appear on the Chart panel.
To display the message sender target, press the Show Sender button.

The target will be shown in the centre of the Chart panel, highlighted with a flashing circle.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 345

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Using AIS Safety Messages Database

Open the AIS panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the left-hand part of the AIS panel to switch to the Safety Messages DB page.

The Safety Messages DB page is intended for displaying database-stored AIS messages with the "Safety" status
over a certain time interval. The page includes the following items:
● Received – to turn on the display of received messages in the table;
● Sent - to turn on the display of sent messages in the table;
● History – time interval over which messages from the database are displayed (from 1 to 30 days);
● Messages table which contains the following columns:
● Data/Time – message receive/send time and date;
● MMSI – addressee’s MMSI;
● Text – text of the message;
● Type – message sending method (Broadcast/Addressed).
Use the Received / Sent radio buttons to select the type of messages to be displayed in the table.
In the History input window set the necessary time interval.

346 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Handling Targets

To display full text of the message, position the cursor on this message.

Safety AIS message files are accessible with the use of the Data Tool utility, in the AIS safety messages group of
the AIS Data feature, and can be imported/exported from/to another PC.
The System Configuration utility features a capability to set the safety messages storage period up to 100 days (see
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation Guide, Chapter 2, section
MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings, item 10).

Handling Targets
Setting of Safety Parameters in Tracking of Targets
ATTENTION! In the ECDIS task with the radar overlay (no Navi-Radar 4000 installed and running) CPA/TCPA
alarm cannot be generated. If the RADAR task installed and running, immediately after the RADAR task shuts
down, all the CPA/TCPA alerts get rectified and due to the loss of the collision avoidance function provided by the
Radar task. For external ARPA targets (ARPA_A, ARPA_B) CPA/TCPA alarms cannot be generated. No danger
status is displayed for such targets. (For more information see documentdocument Multifunctional Display. Navi-
Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section Alert Management Principles,
paragraph General).

Open the Targets panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 347

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Targets panel which will open up, to switch to the Target Table page:

In the top of the Targets panel which will open up, turn on the display of targets from the required sources by
pressing the appropriate buttons: ARPA A(B),Own or AIS.

The Alarm group contains windows for entering CPA/TCPA values.

The CPA/TCPA Tgt ID alarm generation is turned on when both CPA and TCPA values of the target are smaller
than the set values:
● CPA – to enter the minimum closest point of approach distance;
● TCPA – to enter the minimum time to the closest point of approach.

Handling Target Table

Open the Targets panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

348 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Handling Targets

Use the tab in the top part of the Targets panel which will open up, to switch to the Target Table page:

The Target Table contains columns (ARPA and AIS targets) and rows with the targets information with a capability
to sort by the relevant parameter:
● Name – target identifier;
● Alias – target identifier (up to 8 characters) assigned by the operator (the target is displayed on the Chart panel
with this identifier regardless of settings in the AIS Target Identification group);
● CPA – closest point of approach distance;
● TCPA – time to the closest point of approach;
● COG – target course over the ground;
● SOG – target speed over the ground;
● Range – distance to the target;
● Bearing – bearing to the target;
● Bow X – distance to the point where the target crosses the own ship course;
● TBow X – time to the point where the target crosses the own ship course.

Prompt Target Search

Open the Targets panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 349

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Targets panel which will open up, to switch to the Target Table page:

Turn on the display of targets (see section AIS, paragraph Handling AIS Targets and section ARPA, paragraph
Target Display).
Press the button with the target identifier in the Name line of the Targets Table, e.g., “51”.
The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle.

350 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Handling Targets

Turning On Mode of Associating AIS and ARPA Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Targets line and press the left trackball button.

From the Assotiation drop-down list, select targets which will be displayed after the association on the ECDIS task
screen (e.g., AIS).
If association conditions are fulfilled, the ARPA target continues to be tracked but is not displayed on the ECDIS
task screen any more.

The data card of such AIS target displays bearing and distance to its associated ARPA target in the bottom line.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 351

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

If association conditions exceed the set limits, the ARPA target is automatically displayed on the screen.

Turning On DR Mode for AIS Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

352 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Handling Targets

In the list which will open up, select the Targets line and press the left trackball button. Open the AIS page.

In the input line to the right of the DR for AIS tgts button, set the minimum speed of AIS targets for the DR mode.
To turn on the DR mode for AIS targets whose speed is equal to and higher than the set value, press the DR for AIS
tgts button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 353

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Filtering Lost Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Targets line and press the left trackball button.
Open the Acquisition page. Select the Enable "Lost tgt" warning checkbox.

Use the Range input box to set the distance within which the Lost target warning will be generated when the ARPA
or AIS loses a target. Beyond the set distance the lost targets are not at all displayed on the ECDIS task screen any
more without warning.

354 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Handling Targets

Filtering AIS Targets

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Targets line and press the left trackball button.
Open the AIS page.

Select the Sleeping targets checkbox to turn on filtering of sleeping AIS targets by one of the following criteria:
● Select the RNG checkbox and enter the necessary range in the input window to set the distance beyond which
the sleeping AIS targets will not be displayed;
● Select the CPA checkbox and enter the necessary CPA for sleeping AIS targets. No sleeping AIS targets whose
CPA is larger than the set value will be displayed;
● Select the TCPA checkbox and enter the necessary TCPA for sleeping AIS targets. No sleeping AIS targets
whose TCPA is larger than the set value will be displayed.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 355

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

By default, the display of all the AIS target types is enabled:

● Class A; ● SAR aircraft;

● Class B; ● SART;
● AtoN; ● Virtual AtoN.
● Base station;

Clear as required the relevant checkboxes to turn off the display of certain types of AIS targets on the ECDIS task
screen.

NOTE: If the sleeping AIS targets filtering is enabled, or the display of some AIS targets type it turned off, the
AIS filter important indication is displayed in the Vectors window of the Control Panel (see also document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 4, section
Indications, paragraph Display of Important Indications).

Open the Acquisition page.

By default, the Activate AIS targets filter is turned off.

Select the Activate AIS targets checkbox for the automatic activation of sleeping AIS targets by one of the
following criteria:
● Select the RNG checkbox and enter the necessary range in the input window to set the distance. All the AIS
targets closer than the set range will be activated automatically;
● Select the CPA checkbox and enter the necessary CPA for the sleeping AIS targets. All the sleeping AIS targets
whose CPA is smaller than the set value will be activated automatically;
● Select the TCPA checkbox and enter the necessary TCPA for the sleeping AIS targets. All the sleeping AIS
targets whose TCPA is smaller than the set value will be activated automatically.

356 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Handling Radar Information and Target Designation Units • Handling Targets

Obtaining Information on Target

Turn on the display of targets (see section AIS, paragraph Handling AIS Targets and section ARPA, paragraph
Target Display).
Position the free View cursor on the necessary target; the cursor will change its form. Press the left trackball button:
the target data card with its parameters will be displayed next to the target:

ARPA TARGET AIS TARGET

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 357

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task

This chapter describes the procedure used in the reception of all kinds of information in the ECDIS task.

Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects 359

Obtaining Information on Point Type Objects 359
Obtaining Information on Line and Area Type Objects 360
Obtaining Information on Vector Charts 361
Obtaining Information on Updating Objects 362
Obtaining Information on Map Objects 363
Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents 364
Obtaining Information on the Change of Tidal Heights 364
Display of Tidal Heights on Chart Panel 369
Obtaining Information on Tidal Currents 370
Obtaining Information on Surface Currents 371
Use of Animation 372
Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon 374
Obtaining Current System Information 377
Obtaining Information on Ports 379
Obtaining Information by Port Name 379
Obtaining Information by Region Name 380
Obtaining Information by Country Name 381
Obtaining Information by Cursor Position on Chart Panel 382
Quick Search for Selected Port 383
Obtaining NAVTEX Information 384
Work with NAVTEX Message Database 384
Work with Messages 388
Obtaining Information on Own Ship AIS Data 391
Obtaining Information on Current License 392
Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages 393
Display of Data Flow Between MFD and Different External Devices 394
COM Trace Record 395

358 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects

Obtaining Information on Vector Chart Objects

Obtaining Information on Point Type Objects
Set the display of the required area by using the Scaling and Review functions.

Press the button on the Control panel: the Info panel will open up in the bottom part of the screen.
Position the acquisition cursor which will appear, on the object which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball button. The Info panel will display (under the chart name) the list of pages with available
information on the objects which fall within the acquisition cursor outline.

Select the necessary notation by positioning the cursor on the name and press the left trackball button: the Info
panel will open a page with information on the selected objects:

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 359

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining Information on Line and Area Type Objects

Set the display of the required area by using the Scaling and Review functions. Press the button on the Control
panel. The Info panel will open up in the bottom part of the screen.
Position the acquisition cursor which will appear, on the boundary of an area type object or any part of a line type
object which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball button. The Info panel will display (under the chart name) the list of pages with available
information on the objects which fall within the acquisition cursor outline.

Select the necessary notation by positioning the cursor on the name and press the left trackball button: the Info
panel will open a page with information on the selected objects.

360 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Vector Charts

Obtaining Information on Vector Charts

Set the display of the required area by using the Scaling and Review functions.

Press the button on the Control panel. The Info panel will open up in the bottom part of the screen.
Position the acquisition cursor which will appear, on point of the chart which information is required to be obtained
on.

Press the left trackball button. The Info panel will display (under the chart name) the list of pages with available
information on the objects which fall within the acquisition cursor outline.

Select the General Chart Information notation by positioning the cursor on it, and press the left trackball button.
The page with information on the vector chart will open up.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 361

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining Information on Updating Objects

Set the display of the required area by using the Scaling and Review functions.

Press the button on the Control panel. The Info panel will open up in the bottom part of the screen.

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Position the acquisition cursor which will appear, on the updating object which information is required to be obtained
on.

Press the left trackball button. The Info panel will display (above the chart name) the list of pages with available
information on the updating objects and navigation chart which fall within the acquisition cursor outline.

Select the Manual correction by positioning the cursor on this notation and press the left trackball button. The Info
panel will display a page with information on the categories of updating objects which fall within the acquisition
marker outline.
Select the required object category by positioning the cursor on it and press the left trackball button. The window will
display the page with information on the objects of this category.

362 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Map Objects

Obtaining Information on Map Objects

Set the display of the required area by using the Scaling and Review functions. Press the button on the Control
panel. The Info panel will open up in the bottom part of the screen.

ATTENTION! Point type objects cannot be displayed on scales smaller than 1:600,000.

Position the acquisition cursor which will appear, on the map object which information is required to be obtained on.

Press the left trackball button. The Info panel will display (above the chart name) the list of pages with available
information on the map objects and navigation chart which fall within the acquisition cursor outline.

Select User charts layer A (B) by positioning the cursor on this notation and press the left trackball button. The Info
panel will display a page with information on the categories of map objects which fall within the acquisition marker
outline.
Select the required object category by positioning the cursor on it and press the left trackball button. The window will
display the page with information on the objects of this category.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 363

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Obtaining Information on the Change of Tidal Heights
Open the Tasks panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Tasks panel to switch to the Tides page.

Use the tab in the top right part of the Tides page which will open up, to switch to the Place tab.

364 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In the right-hand part of the Place tab which will open up, select the reference point by using one of the following
procedures:
● Enter the reference point name in the By name input line and press <ENTER>;
● Select the All Places checkbox.

In the list in the left-hand part of the page which will open up, select the reference point and double click the left
trackball button.
● Select the By cursor checkbox; enter the radius of the area coverage circle in the Distance input line which will
open up.

Press the Find button. Position the graphic cursors which will appear, on the point within the Chart panel which
will be the centre of the area coverage circle.

Press the left trackball button. In the list of reference points which fall within the coverage area in the left-hand
part of the page, select the reference point and double click the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 365

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Information Displayed Graphically

After the selection of the reference point, the Diagram tab will open up, displaying the tidal curve for the selected
reference point.

In the Date line of the Diagram tab, select the date starting from which the tidal heights will be calculated. Use the
Period input line to enter the period which tidal heights are required to be calculated for.
The following parameters can be set:
● UKC – under keel clearance;
● Draught – ship’s draught;
● Min. Chart depth – the minimum depth on the chart.

Select the Marks checkbox to show the time marks on the diagram.
On the graph, blue is used for showing the time periods when the actual depth is safe, and red for showing the time
intervals with dangerous depths.
Select the Cursor Data checkbox. Position the cursor on the tidal curve and by moving the cursor with the trackball,
set the necessary time value in the cursor information window.

Read the tidal height value in the cursor information window.

366 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Information Displayed in Tabular Form

After the selection of the reference point, the Diagram tab will open up displaying the tidal curve for the selected
reference point.

Use the tab in the top right part of the page to switch to the Table tab.

In the Date line of the Table tab, select the date starting from which the tidal heights will be calculated. Use the
Period input line to enter the period which tidal heights are required to be calculated for.
To calculate tidal tables, use one of the following procedures:
● In the Table Properties group, select the Show high/low water checkbox.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 367

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The left-hand part of the page will display a table of high and low water.

● In the Table Properties group, select the Time step checkbox; press the button in the activated line for the
input of the tidal height calculations discretion.

In the list which will open up, select the necessary tidal height calculation discretion and press the left trackball
button. The left-hand part of the page will display the tidal height table calculated with the set discretion.

Take the necessary readings in the calculated tables.

368 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Display of Tidal Heights on Chart Panel

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Environment Data line and press the left trackball button.

In the Environment Data display which will open up, select the Tides checkbox. The Chart panel displays tidal
heights in the reference points as of the current time.
Press the Show place button in the top right part of the Tides page on the Tasks panel. The selected reference point
is displayed in the centre of the Chart panel.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 369

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining Information on Tidal Currents

Set the display of the area within the chart screen boundary by using the Scaling and Review functions.
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Environment Data line and press the left trackball button.

In the Environment Data display which will open up, select the Tidal currents checkbox. The Chart panel displays
tidal current vectors as of the current time.

370 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

Select the Currents velocity values checkbox. The Chart panel will display digitally the values of tidal current
speed.

Obtaining Information on Surface Currents

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Environment Data line and press the left trackball button.

In the Environment Data display which will open up, select the Surface currents checkbox.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 371

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The Chart panel displays surface currents vectors as of the current time.

Select the Currents velocity values checkbox. The Chart panel will display digitally the values of surface current
speed.

Use of Animation
Set the display of the area within the chart screen boundaries by using the Scaling and Review functions.
Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

372 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Tides and Currents

In the list which will open up, select the Environment Data line and press the left trackball button.

In the Environment Data display, select checkboxes of parameters whose value change dynamics is required to be
viewed. Press the activated the Animate button to the right of the names of parameters.

In the Date and Ship time input lines of the Animate group which will open up, enter the required viewing start date
and time.
Use the Step input line to enter the discretion of the parameter value change.

View the changes in parameter values by using the buttons.

On the Chart panel, the selected parameters will change with the set discretion.
For the automatic change of parameters with the set discretion, press the Auto button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 373

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up select the Sun/Moon line and press the left trackball button.

The Sun/Moon display is intended for calculating and displaying data on sunrise/sunset and moonrise/moonset in
any set point for a certain date.

374 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Sun/Moon

In the Date input box enter the date by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard.

Press the right trackball button and select Apply.

In the Time zone input box enter the time zone by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard.

Press the right trackball button and select Apply.

Press the Set point button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 375

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Position the graphics cursor which will appear in the required point on the Chart panel.

The graphics cursor coordinates are displayed in the Set point information window in the bottom part of the Control
panel.

Press the activated Calculate button.

376 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Current System Information

The Sun/Moon display will show the following data:

● Sunrise – sunrise time;
● Sunset – sunset time;
● Moonrise – moonrise time;

● Moonset – moonset time;

● Nautical twilight – nautical twilight time:
● Morning start - morning twilight start;
● Evening end - evening twilight end;
● Moonphase – moon phase.

Obtaining Current System Information

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list, which will open up select the System Information line and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 377

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The System Information display is intended for presenting the following data:
● Drift – drift direction and speed;
● Current – summary value of the surface and tidal currents calculated for the current time at the current ship
position;
● SF CNT – current safety contour value determined by the ECDIS task;
● True wind – true wind direction and speed (from the wind sensor data);
● Rel. wind – relative wind direction and speed (from the wind sensor data);
● Water t° – water temperature value from the temperature sensor data;
● Depth – value of water depth under the keel (from the sounder data);
● Tide height – expected tidal height value calculated for the current time at the reference point closest to the ship
position, and the name of this reference point.
To select the true wind vector display mode on the ECDIS task screen, open the Monitoring panel by selecting the
appropriate item of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Monitoring panel which will open up, to switch to the Route Monitoring page.

Press the Wind vector button:

Select the necessary display mode (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 2, section Other Sensors, paragraph Wind Interface).

378 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Ports

Obtaining Information on Ports

Open the Tasks panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Tasks panel to switch to the Ports page:

To obtain information on the required port, use the procedure described below.

Obtaining Information by Port Name

Press the Port button. Type the first letters of the port name or select the port from list with the cursor.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 379

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press left trackball button or <ENTER>. Information on the selected port will be displayed on the page.

Read the necessary information (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 7, section Ports). For obtaining information on other ports, press the Reset button
and repeat the procedure.

Obtaining Information by Region Name

Press the Region button. Type the first letters of the required region or select it from list with the cursor.

Press left trackball button or <ENTER>. Press the Port button. In this case, the list displays ports belonging to the
selected region. Type the first letters of the port name or select the port from the list with the cursor.

380 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Ports

Press the left trackball button or <ENTER>. Information on the selected port will be displayed on the page.

Read the necessary information (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 7, section Ports). For obtaining information on other ports, press the Reset button
and repeat the procedure.

Obtaining Information by Country Name

Press the Country button. Type the first letters of the required country or select it from the list with the cursor.

Press the left trackball button or <ENTER>. Press the Port button. In this case, the list displays ports belonging to
the selected country. Type the first letters of the port name or select the port from list with the cursor.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 381

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the left trackball button or <ENTER>. Information on the selected port will be displayed on the page.

Read the necessary information (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 7, section Ports). For obtaining information on other ports, press the Reset button
and repeat the procedure.

Obtaining Information by Cursor Position on Chart Panel

Press the Select Area button. Position the graphics cursor which will appear, in the corner of the required chart area.

Press the left trackball button. Select the required chart fragment by moving the cursor with the trackball.

382 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Ports

Press the left trackball button to exit from the graphics cursor mode. Press the Port button. In this case, the list displays
ports belonging to selected area. Type the first letters of the port name or select the port from the list with the cursor.

Press the left trackball button or <ENTER> keyboard key. Information on the selected port will be displayed on the
page.

Read the necessary information (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Functional Description, Chapter 7, section Ports). For obtaining information on other ports, press the Reset button
and repeat the procedure.

Quick Search for Selected Port

Select the necessary port as described above. Press the Highlight button.

The selected target will be displayed in the center of the Chart panel highlighted with a flashing circle.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 383

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Open the Navtex panel by selecting the appropriate item of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

See document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 7,
section NAVTEX Messages.

Work with NAVTEX Message Database

NAVTEX messages from the database are shown in the Message Table, filter settings taken into account.

384 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining NAVTEX Information

The Message Table contains the following message parameter fields:

● ! – “Danger” message attribute or empty field (set automatically on the messages containing coordinates);
● Date/Time – message reception date/time (UTC from MFD);
● Subj – message subject (identifiers are taken from the message);
● Freq – frequency (kHz) which the message was received on (for the NMEA NAVTEX only);
● Serial Num. – message number from the NAVTEX message;
● Text – the first two lines of a NAVTEX message;
● Err. Rate – message reception error transmitted by the NAVTEX receiver for NMEA NAVTEX or calculated by
the MFD for ASCII NAVTEX;
● Status – message status (“Protected” or empty field).

For the message sorting by one of parameters, press the appropriate button with the column name in the Message
Table (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description,
Chapter 7, section NAVTEX Messages).
To turn on the filter, press the ON button in the Filter row:

To make the filter settings, press the Stations button. The All checkbox is selected by default, and the Message
Table shows messages from all the stations. Select the checkboxes of stations whose messages should be
displayed in the Message Table. The Message Table will display NAVTEX messages from the specified stations
regardless of the NAVAREA area:

Use a similar procedure to make settings for message filtering by the following parameters:
● Subjects – if message subjects from the offered list are selected, messages with these subjects are displayed.
In this case, it is impossible to turn off displays with message subjects A, B, D and L (see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 7, section
NAVTEX Messages, paragraph NAVTEX Messages Database);

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 385

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

● Max error rate – messages whose reception error rate exceeds the set value are not displayed. Setting of the
maximum error rate at 100% means the display of all the messages.

The Message Table will display messages to match all the three settings (see document Multifunctional Display.
Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 7, section NAVTEX Messages).
To promptly find a message in the NAVTEX message table, corresponding to the NAVTEX message symbol on the
Chart panel, press the Find button in the top right corner of the panel.

Position the acquisition marker which will appear on the Chart panel on the necessary NAVTEX message symbol.

Press the left trackball button.

386 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining NAVTEX Information

The NAVTEX message corresponding to this symbol will be shown in the table with appropriate highlighting.

To update the NAVTEX message database, press the Update Database button.

NOTE: The database is updated automatically at a rate (5 to 60 minutes) set in the System Configuration utility at
the time of installation (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation
Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph MFD Settings).

Press Navtex Out Monitor to receive messages from the NAVTEX receiver without taking into account the filter set
in the receiver.

ATTENTION! The Navtex Out Monitor button should always be depressed. As filter settings are changed in the
NAVTEX receiver, the button will be released, and it is necessary to press it again.

To delete one or several messages from the database, select them with the cursor in the Message Table. To select
several messages required to be deleted, select them keeping the <CTRL> key depressed. To select several
messages in a row, specify the first and the last message keeping the <SHIFT> key depressed.

Press the Delete button: messages will be deleted.

To delete messages received before some a certain moment of time, position the cursor in the input window to the
right of the Delete till button and make a double click on the left trackball button.

Set the required value by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard. Press the right trackball button and select
Apply.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 387

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Press the Yes button to confirm the deleting of messages.

Messages will be deleted.

NOTE: If a message has the “Protected” status, the Delete button will be inactive, and you will not be able to delete
the message from the database. When several messages are deleted, messages with the “Protected” status
will not be deleted.

To print out one or several messages from the database, select them with the cursor in the Message Table in the
manner specified above, and press the Print button.

To convert one or several messages from the database to the *.pdf file, select them with the cursor in the Message
Table in the manner specified above, and press the To PDF button.

Work with Messages

To work with messages, use the bottom part of the Navtex panel. Use the cursor to select the necessary message
in the Message Table, the text of the message will be shown in the bottom part of the Navtex panel.

Setting NAVTEX Message Status and Attributes

Select the Examined checkbox to change the message status to “Examined”. This means that the
user has read the NAVTEX message. NAVTEX message symbols from a message with the “Examined” status will
be displayed on the ECDIS task screen in the following form: .

Select the Protected checkbox to change the message status to “Protected”. This means that the
user will not be able to delete this NAVTEX message.

The “Danger” attribute is set by default if there is at least one pair of valid coordinates in the
NAVTEX message.

Select the Polygon checkbox to set the “Polygon” attribute. This is only possible for the messages
in which more than one pair of valid coordinates is available.
After making all the settings, press the activating Apply button (see document
Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Functional Description, Chapter 7, section NAVTEX
Messages).

388 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining NAVTEX Information

Editing Coordinates in NAVTEX Message

1. Position the cursor on the coordinates which should be edited in the right bottom box of the Navtex panel and
make a double click on the left trackball button.

Set the required value by rolling the trackball, or enter it from the keyboard. Press the right trackball button and
select Apply.

Press the left trackball button again: the edited value will be set. The coordinate value in the window is shown in
italic indicating that the field has been edited by the user.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 389

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

2. To add a new NAVTEX message symbol, position the cursor on the symbol coordinates, which will be followed
by the new symbol coordinates in the table (this is important for the subsequent setting of the “Polygon” attribute)
and press the left trackball button. Press the Add button. A new line containing the same coordinates as the old
ones will be displayed.

Edit the coordinates as described above. The new coordinate values in the window are shown in italic indicating
that the field has been edited by the user.
3. To delete a NAVTEX message symbol, position the cursor on its coordinates and press the left trackball button.

Press the Delete button.

The NAVTEX message symbol coordinates will be deleted from the table.
After making the changes, press the Apply button which will be activated.

390 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Own Ship AIS Data

Fast Search for NAVTEX Message Symbol on the Chart Panel

Position the cursor on the coordinates of the NAVTEX message symbol which should be found and press the left
trackball button.

Press the Highlight button.

The selected target will be displayed in the centre of the Chart panel, highlighted with a flashing circle.

Obtaining Information on Own Ship AIS Data

Press the button with the name of the set display in the Display Panel window of the Control panel.

In the list which will open up, select the Sensor Data/Status line and press the left trackball button.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 391

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

Use the tab in the top part of the Sensor Data/Status display panel which will open up, to switch to the AIS VDL
Data page.

The AIS VDL Data display is intended for the display of data broadcast by the transponder. The display contains the
following data:
● Source – current positioning system used by the transponder: Internal Int or External Ext (D-GPS); the display of
the positioning system indicator in the green colour means that the RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring) GNSS receiver is in use;
● UTC – UTC synchronising status in the AIS transponder; it is determined strictly by the Internal GPS;
● Latitude – latitude value supplied by the positioning system used by the transponder;
● Longitude – longitude value supplied by the positioning system used by the transponder;
● COG – value of course over the ground supplied by the positioning system used by the transponder;
● SOG – value of speed over the ground supplied by the positioning system used by the transponder;
● HDG – heading value supplied to the transponder by the course detection (gyro) system;
● ROT – values of direction and rate of turn supplied to the transponder by the Rate-of-Turn sensor.

Obtaining Information on Current License

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

392 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the License Info page.

The License Info page is intended for the display of data on the MFD software product license and the functions
allowed to be used (licensed). This page also specifies the installed MFD version. For the update license see
document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Utilities, Chapter 8.

Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

Open the Config panel by selecting the appropriate line of the Tasks List menu in the tabs zone of the ECDIS task
screen.

Use the tab in the top part of the Config panel which will open up, to switch to the COM Trace page.

This page is intended for displaying and recording of the IEC 61162-1, 61993-2, and proprietary formats and similar
text messages/sentences provided to the MFD from the external sensors and displaying of the sentences
transmitted by the MFD to the external devices.

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 393

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

The page contains the following elements:

● Connected sensors – group of buttons corresponding to the external devices connected via the System
Configuration utility (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350). Installation
Guide, Chapter 2, section MFD Configuration, paragraph Sensors Settings); the buttons allow selection of a
sensor or external device, which the exchange of messages with is shown on the data display window;
● Port – group of indicators of the MFD COM ports, which the sensors and external devices are connected to;
● Clear trace – to clear the display window;
● Input filter – to turn on the display of messages supplied to the MFD from the external sensors;
● Output filter – to turn on the display of messages transmitted by the MFD to the external devices;
● Record COM trace – recording of the message stream from all the WS COM ports to a comtrace._____ file;
● Data display window:

● Sensor – direction and source of the message stream;

● Data – messages.

Display of Data Flow Between MFD and Different External

Devices
To display the traffic between the MFD and the necessary external device, press the button with the name of this
device in the Connected sensors column.

The data flow will be shown in the Trace window. The Input filter and Output filter checkboxes are selected by
default, so the Trace window shows the flow of both incoming and outgoing MFD data. To display the data flow in
one direction only, turn off the pertinent filter.

NOTE:You can simultaneously monitor the data flow from several external devices by pressing the appropriate
buttons.

To clear the Trace window, press the Clear trace button.

394 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

COM Trace Record

ATTENTION! For each WS, a comtrace._____ file can be recorded for the COM ports of this WS only.

Press the Record COM trace button.

In the COM Trace window which will open up, the Ports list column contains all the connected COM ports of the
WS in question. Next to the port which the message stream should be recorded to comtrace._____ file for, press
the button in the Map to column.

From the pull-down list, select the virtual VIRTX port for the given COM port.

NOTE: For each COM port, an individual VIRT port should be selected.

For each COM port which the comtrace._____ file will be recorded for (e.g. COM1, COM5 and COM8), set the
corresponding virtual port (VIRT1, VIRT2 and VIRT3).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 395

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS • User Manual Version 3.02.350

In the Ports list column, press the buttons with the names of the ports which the comtrace._____ file will be
recorded for: the data flow will be shown in the data display window. Press the Start record button.

The comtrace._____ file recording will be made from all the turned on COM ports during the time specified in the
Duration box (30 minutes by default). If it is necessary to interrupt the recording, press the Start record button
again. After the end of the recording, the Start record button will be automatically disabled.

For the further use, copy the comtrace._____ file from the C:\Transas\ComTrace.FA directory onto the external
carrier by using the Data Tool utility (see document Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS (v. 3.02.350).
Utilities, Chapter 2, section Software Description, paragraph Data Tool Utility Window, under Internal Group).

NOTE: When a new comtrace._____ file is recorded, the old file in the C:\Transas\ComTrace.FA directory will be
rewritten.

To clear the data display window, press the Clear button.

To close the COM Trace window, press the Close button.

For additional settings of the comtrace._____ file recording, press the Settings button.

Press the OK button.

NOTE: With the use of the password by the service engineer, more advanced settings of the comtrace._____ file
recording can be made, normally unavailable to the ordinary user, remaining grayed.

Press the OK button.

396 Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved.

 Obtaining Information in ECDIS Task • Obtaining Information on Input/Output Messages

To record the file direct onto an external carrier, press the Writing To Folder button and specify the path to the
external carrier.

In the Set duration input window, set the duration of recording the comtrace._____ file (not more than 30 min).

Copyright © 2021 Wärtsilä Voyage Limited. All rights reserved. 397

Multifunctional Display. Navi-Sailor 4000 ECDIS
User Manual
Version 3.02.350

Technical support

Phone number +46 771 460 100

E-mail [email protected]

www.wartsila.com